r»nn*iMni 
IT(iT'imi!B 
B 9 IiJCI m M W\% 9m i*C ■§2 
MB DRILL BOOK 
FOR THE 
HOSPITAL CORPS 
UNITED STATES NAVY 
THE BUREAU OF MEDICINE AND SURGERY 
PUBLISHED BY 
UNDER THE AUTHORITY OF 
THE SECRETARY OF THE NAVY 
UNITED STATES 
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 
WASHINGTON : 1912 Washington, D. C., July 1, 1942. 
Department of the Navy, 
The Drill Book for the Hospital Corps, United 
States Navy, 1942, revised and corrected under the 
supervision of the Bureau of Medicine and Surgery, 
Navy Department, Washington, D. C., is issued for 
the instruction and guidance of the Hospital Corps 
and for the information of the Navy. 
The instructions contained herein supersede all 
others of a similar nature and will be strictly 
observed. 
Frank Knox, 
II 
Secretary of the Navy. Pape 
FOREWORD v 
Abbreviations vi 
Chapter I.—GLOSSARY AND GENERAL 
PRINCIPLES 1 
Section I.—Glossary 1 
Section 2.—General Principles 7 
Chapter lI.—MILITARY COURTESIES 15 
Chapter ILL—PHYSICAL DRILL 25 
Section I.—Formation 25 
Section 2.—The Drill 26 
Chapter IV.—SCHOOL OP THE RECRUIT-_ 57 
Section I.—General 58 
Section 2.—Positions 65 
Section 3.—Steps and Marchings 65 
Chapter V.—SCHOOLS OF THE SQUAD, 
PLATOON, AND COMPANY 71 
Section I.—School of the Squad 72 
Section 2.—School of the Platoon 79 
Section 3.—School of the Company 89 
Chapter VI.—MANUAL OF THE ARMY LIT- 
TER 101 
Section I.—General 101 
Section 2.—lnstruction in the use of the 
Army Litter 106 
TABLE OF CONTENTS 
Ill IV 
TABLE OF CONTENTS 
Page 
Chapter VII.—TRANSPORTATION OF THE 
SICK AND INJURED 145 
Section I.—Transportation with Army 
Litter 145 
Section 2.—Transportation with Navy 
Litter 180 
Section 3.—Transportation without Lit- 
ters 201 
Chapter VIII.—LANDING FORCES AND 
SHIP BATTLE DRILL 239 
Section I.—The Landing Force 239 
Section 2.—The Expeditionary Force 274 
Section 3.—Ship Battle Drill 292 
Chapter IX.—TENT DRILL AND SHELTER_ 317 
Section 1.—Pitching Single Shelter 
Tents 317 
Section 2.—Pitching Double Shelter 
Tents 322 
Section 3.—Striking Shelter Tents 325 
Section 4.—Medical Tentage 325 
Section 5.—Shelter 332 
Appendix.—LIFESAVING METHODS 337 
Index 345 FOREWORD 
In the preparation of this revised edition of the 
Drill Book for the Hospital Corps, U. S. Navy, fre- 
quent reference has been made to U. S. Navy Regu- 
lations, the Landing Force Manual, U. S. Navy, 1938, 
from which figures 1,2, 3,4, 99, and 100 are repro- 
duced, the 1941 edition of U. S. Army Medical Field 
Manual No. FM 8-35, Transportation of the Sick and 
Wounded, from which figures 5 and 6 are reproduced, 
and the Manual of the Medical Department, U. S. 
Navy, 1938. 
The purpose of the instructions contained in this 
book is to enable members of the Hospital Corps, 
U. S. Navy, to become familiar with their equipment, 
to develop in them that military bearing and prompt 
obedience to command which is essential to any 
part of a military organization, and to so train them 
that they can instruct others in methods of trans- 
porting the sick and injured on board ship, in the 
field, or elsewhere. 
The assistance rendered by the U. S. Navy 
Hospital Corps Schools at Portsmouth, Va., and San 
Diego, Calif., and by the Medical Department, Sec- 
ond Marine Division, Fleet Marine Force, in the 
revision is acknowledged. 
Ross T Mclntire. 
Surgeon General, U. S. Navy. 
V ABBREVIATIONS 
Div., D Division. 
D-l Division Adjutant. 
D-2 Division Intelligence. 
D-3 Division Operations. 
D-4 Division Supplies. 
Brig., B Brigade. 
B-l, B-2, B-3, B-4 Brigade Offices. 
Reg., R Regiment. 
R-2, R-3, R-4 Regimental Offices. 
Bn : Battalion. 
Bn-1, Bn-2, Bn-3, Bn-4. Battalion Offices. 
Co Company. 
CO Commanding Officer. 
CPO Chief Petty Officer. 
POlc Petty Officer First Class. 
PI Platoon. 
Sq Squadron or Squad. 
Hdqtrs Headquarters. 
Gr Group. 
A-2-Med Company A, 2d Medical 
Battalion. 
3-M-2 Company M, 3d Battalion 
2d Marines. 
VI CHAPTER I 
GLOSSARY AND GENERAL PRINCIPLES 
Section I.—GLOSSARY 
Alignment.—(l) A straight line upon which sev- 
eral elements are formed, or are to be formed. 
(2) The dressing of several elements upon a 
straight line. 
Attached.—Temporarily assigned without becom- 
ing an organic part of. 
Attached Unit.—A unit placed temporarily under 
the orders of a commander other than its regular 
commander. 
Base.—The element on which a movement or for- 
mation is regulated. 
Beaten Zone.—(l) The intersection of the cone of 
dispersion or sheaf of fire with the surface on which 
the target is located. 
(2) The space on the ground in which bullets 
strike. 
Center.—The middle point or element of a com- 
mand. 
Coach and Pupil Method of Instruction.—A 
method by which men work in pairs, one as in- 
structor, called the coach; the other, under instruc- 
1 2 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
tlon, called the pupil. Each in turn acts as coach 
and pupil. 
Column.—A formation in which the elements are 
placed one behind another. 
Defilade.—(l) Concealment from enemy observa- 
tion or protection from his fire by intervening ob- 
stacles, such as hills or ridges. 
(2) The vertical distance from the defiladed posi- 
tion to the line of sighting or trajectory which just 
clears the covering mask. 
(3) To protect by defilade. 
Demonstration.—An attack delivered on a front 
where a decision is not sought, made with the object 
of deceiving the enemy as to the point of decisive 
action. 
Deploy.—To extend the front; in general, to change 
from column to line, or from close order to extended 
order. 
Depth.—(l) The space from head to rear of any 
formation or of a position, including the leading 
and rear elements. 
(2) The depth of a man is assumed to be 12 inches. 
Distance.—(l) Space between elements in the di- 
rection of depth. 
(2) Distance is measured with respect to dis- 
mounted men, from the back of the man in front to 
the breast of the man in the rear, or, in case of GLOSSARY AND GENERAL PRINCIPLES 
3 
vehicles, from the rear part of the vehicle in front 
to the front part of the vehicle or breasts of leading 
men on drags (as the case may be) in rear. 
(3) Distance between troops in formation is meas- 
ured from the rear rank of the unit in front to the 
front rank of the unit in rear. 
(4) Platoon commanders, guides, and others 
whose position in a formation is at 40 inches dis- 
tance from a rank are themselves considered a rank. 
Otherwise the commander of any unit and those 
accompanying him are not considered in measuring 
distance between units. 
(5) The colors and guard are not consdered in 
measuring distance between subdivisions of a unit 
with which they are posted. 
(6) The distance between ranks of dismounted 
men is 40 inches in both line and column. 
Double Time.—A cadence of 180 steps to the 
minute, the length of the step being 36 inches. 
Echelon.—(1) In battle formations, the different 
fractions of a command in the direction of depth, 
to each of which a principle combat mission is 
assigned: e. g., the assault echelon, support echelon, 
and reserve echelon. 
(2) The various subdivisions of a headquarters, 
as forward echelon (the command group), and rear 
echelon (administration and supply group). 4 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
(3) A formation where the elements are arranged 
in parallel lines, but displaced in depth to the right 
or left. For example, when a platoon is in the 
triangular formation with the leading squad in front 
of the center of the interval between the two rear 
squads, rear squads are echeloned to the right and 
left. 
Element.—One of the component subdivisions of 
a command, such as a file, squad, platoon, company 
or any unit forming part of a larger unit. 
Field Music.—The musicians of an organization 
other than the band; normally consisting of buglers 
(trumpeters) and drummers. 
Plank.—(l) The right or left of a command in 
line or column. 
(2) The element on the right or left of the line. 
(3) Either side of a force or of a position. 
Formation.—(l) The arrangement of the elements 
of a command. 
(2) The placing of all fractions in their order in 
line, in column, or for battle. 
Front.—(1) The lateral space occupied by an 
element or unit measured from one flank to the op- 
posite flank. The front of a man is assumed to be 
22 inches. 
(2) When a combat situation does not exist or is 
not assumed, the front is the direction towards which 
the command is faced. GLOSSARY AND GENERAL PRINCIPLES 
5 
(3) The direction of the enemy. 
Frontage.—The extent of front occupied or cov- 
ered by a unit in any drill or battle formation. 
Group.—A number of men formed for a specific 
purpose. 
Guide.—(l) An individual upon whom an organi- 
zation or element regulates its march or alignment. 
(2) To regulate upon in marching. 
Head.—The leading element of a column in what- 
ever direction the column may be facing or moving. 
Interval.—(l) A space between military units or 
elements on the same line. 
(2) Interval is measured, with respect to dis- 
mounted men, from the shoulder or elbow; vehicles 
from the hub of the wheel or the track. 
(3) Between troops in formation, interval is 
measured from the left flank of the unit on the 
right flank of the unit on the left. 
(4) The normal interval is one arm’s length; the 
close interval is 4 inches. 
(5) The commander of any unit, or element there- 
of, and those accompanying him are not considered 
in measuring interval between units. 
(6) The colors and guard are not considered in 
measuring interval between elements of a unit with 
which they are posted. 6 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Left.—The left extremity or element of a body of 
troops. 
Line.—A formation in which the different elemehts 
are abreast of each other. 
Litter.—Either the Army or Navy litter with 
bearers, or the men assigned to it without their litter. 
Mass Formation.—The formation of a company or 
any larger unit in which the squads in column are 
abreast of one another. 
Order, Close.—A drill formation in which the 
elements are arranged in line or column with normal 
distances and normal or close intervals. 
Order, Extended.—A formation in which the in- 
dividuals or units are separated by intervals or dis- 
tances, or both, greater than those in close order. 
Pace.—A step of 30 inches; length of the full step 
in quick time. 
Point of Rest.—(l) The point at which a forma- 
tion begins. 
(2) Specifically, the point toward which units are 
aligned in successive movements. 
Quick Time.—(l) A cadence of 120 steps to the 
minute, the length of the step being 30 inches. 
(2) The normal cadence for drills and ceremonies. 
Rank.—A line of men placed side by side. 
Right.—The right extremity or element of a body 
of troops. GLOSSARY AND GENERAL PRINCIPLES 
7 
Step.—The distance measured from heel to heel 
between the feet of a man walking. The half step 
and back step are 15 inches. The right step and 
left step are 12 inches. The steps in quick and 
double time are 30 and 36 inches, respectively. 
Chief Petty Officer.—A petty officer (normally a 
chief petty officer or petty officer, first class), to per- 
form the duties of the first sergeant of a company. 
First Petty Officer.—A petty officer (normally 
a petty officer, first or second class), to perform the 
duties of a sergeant. 
Second Petty Officer.—A petty officer (normally 
a petty officer, second or third class), to perform the 
duties of a corporal. 
Section 2—GENERAL PRINCIPLES 
1-1. Scope.—The drills described herein are de- 
signed for general use and may be adapted to any 
type of unit; therefore some of the explanation is 
of a general nature which gives sufficient latitude 
for adaptation to specific units. Interpretation 
should be based on these general provisions, and 
all should learn to use this book as a guide to a 
common-sense solution of minor points which are 
not specifically covered in the text. Much discus- 
sion over trifles or failure to make appropriate adap- 
tation indicates a failure to grasp the spirit of the 8 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
regulations. Higher commanders should encourage 
subordinates to make minor adjustments without 
calling on higher authority for interpretation. 
Necessary adaptation should be simple and should 
not complicate the drill. Stress should be placed 
on precision in execution and in marching in step 
with proper alinement. Nothing inspires the mili- 
tary spirit more than to see or to be a part of a 
compact group moving in unison, confidently, and 
to a measured cadence. Complicated procedure 
destroys this effect. 
1-2. Purposes of Drill.—The purposes of drill 
are to: (a) Enable a commander to move his com- 
mand from one place to another in an orderly man- 
ner and to provide simple formations from which 
dispositions may readily be assumed; (b) Aid in 
disciplinary training by instilling habits of precision 
and response to the leader’s orders; (c) Provide a 
means, through ceremonies, of enhancing the 
morale, developing the spirit of cohesion, and giving 
interesting spectacles to the public; and (d) Give 
junior officers and noncommissioned officers practice 
in commanding bodies of men. 
1-3. Precision in Drill.—ln order best to accom- 
plish its mission, drill should be frequent and of 
short duration. Smartness and precision should be 
required in the execution of every detail. GLOSSARY AND GENERAL PRINCIPLES 
9 
1-4. Use of Right and Left.—The explanation of 
a movement in the text that may be executed towards 
either flank is generally given for execution towards 
but one flank. To adapt such a description to exe- 
cution of the movement towards the opposite flank, 
it is necessary only to substitute the word “left” for 
“right” or “right” for “left” as the case requires. 
1-5. Double Time.—(a) Any movement not espe- 
cially excepted may be executed in double time, 
(b) If a unit is at a halt or marching in quick time, 
and it is desired that a movement be executed in 
double time, the command double time precedes the 
command of execution. 
1-6. To Revoke a Command.—To revoke a com- 
mand or to begin anew a movement improperly 
begun from a halt, the command AS YOU WERE is 
given, at which the movement ceases and the former 
position is resumed. 
1-7. General Rules for the Guide.—(a) Unless 
otherwise announced the guide of a platoon or sub- 
division of a company in column or line is right, 
(b) To march with the guide other than as pre- 
scribed before, or to change the guide, the com- 
mand GUIDE RIGHT (LEFT, OR CENTER) is given. 
The leading man in each file is responsible for the 
interval. The guide is responsible for the direc- 
tion and cadence of march, (c) The announce- 10 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
ment of the guide, when made in connection with 
a movement, follows the command of execution for 
the movement. (d) In column of subdivisions, thp 
guide of the leading subdivision is charged with the 
step and direction; the guides in the rear preserve 
the trace, step, and distance. 
1-8. Partial Changes of Direction.—(a) Changes 
of direction of 45 degrees may be executed by inter- 
polating in the preparatory command the word 
“half,” as column half right (left), (b) Slight 
changes in direction are effected by the command 
incline to the right (left) . The guide or guiding 
element moves in the indicated direction and the 
remainder of the command conforms. 
1-9. Numbering of Units.—Squads, sections, and 
platoons are numbered consecutively from right to 
left and from front to rear throughout the com- 
pany and thereafter retain their permanent desig- 
nation. 
1-10. Posts of Officers, Petty Officers, Guidons, 
and Special Units.—(a) The posts of officers, petty 
officers, guidons, and special units in the various 
formations of infantry units are explained in 
the text, (b) When changes of formation involve 
changes of posts, the new post is taken by the most 
direct route, except where otherwise prescribed, as 
soon as practicable after the command of execution GLOSSARY AND GENERAL PRINCIPLES 
11 
for the movement; officers and petty officers who 
have prescribed duties in connection with the move- 
ment ordered take their new posts when such duties 
are completed. In executing any movement or fac- 
ing in aligning units, or in moving from one post to 
another, officers and petty officers maintain a mili- 
tary bearing and move with precision, (c) When 
acting as instructors, officers and petty officers go 
wherever their presence is necessary. They rectify 
mistakes and insure steadiness and promptness in 
the ranks, id) In subsequent movements after the 
initial formation, guidons and special units maintain 
their relative positions with respect to the flank or 
end of the command on which they were originally 
posted. 
(e) In all formations and movements, a petty 
officer commanding a section, platoon, or company 
takes the same post as prescribed for an officer in 
command. 
1-11. Commands.—(a) Commands are employed in 
close-order drill at attention. 
(b) In this book a command is the direction of 
the commander expressed orally and in prescribed 
phraseology. 
(c) Where it is not mentioned who gives the pre- 
scribed commands they will be given by the com- 
mander of the unit. 
486912°—43 2 12 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
(d) There are two kinds of commands: 
(1) The preparatory command, such as forward, 
which indicates the movement that is to be executed. 
(2) The command of execution, such as MARCH, 
HALT, etc., which causes the execution. 
(e) Preparatory commands are distinguished in 
this book by small capitals and those of execution by 
large capitals. 
(/) The preparatory command is given at such 
interval of time before the command of execution 
as to admit of proper understanding and to permit 
the giving of necessary commands by subordinate 
leaders; the command of execution is given at the 
instant the movement is to commence, 
(g) The tone of the command should be animated, 
distinct, and of a loudness proportioned to the num- 
ber of men for whom it is intended. Indifference in 
giving commands must be avoided, as this leads to 
laxity in execution. Commands must be given with 
spirit. 
(h) When giving commands to troops, the com- 
mander faces them. When the section or platoon 
in close-order drill or in ceremonies is part of a 
larger unit, the leader turns his head toward the 
unit to give commands but does not face about. 
(i) Officers and men fix their attention at the first 
word of command. GLOSSARY AND GENERAL PRINCIPLES 
13 
(j) If all men in the unit are to execute the same 
movement simultaneously, the subordinate leaders 
do not repeat commands; otherwise they repeat the 
command or give the proper new command for the 
movement of their own unit. 
ik) If at a halt, the commands for movements in- 
volving marching, such as: (1.) column right, (2.) 
MARCH, are not prefaced by the command forward. 
1-12. Instruction by the Numbers.—All move- 
ments for the purpose of instruction may be divided 
into motions and executed in detail. The command 
of execution determines the prompt execution of 
the first motion. The other motions, depending on 
the number, are executed at the commands TWO, 
THREE, FOUR. To execute the movement in detail 
the instructor first cautions, “by the numbers.” All 
movements are then executed in detail, one motion 
for each count until he cautions, “without the 
numbers.” CHAPTER II 
MILITARY COURTESIES 
2-1. General.—Courtesy, as generally understood, 
implies polite, respectful, and considerate behavior 
towards others and is as necessary in military life 
as in civil life. 
Military courtesy not only includes most of the 
conventional courtesies recognized in civil life but 
also prescribes a code of behavior and certain rules 
of conduct that are distinctive of and peculiar to 
the armed services, outside of which they are not 
ordinarily practiced. In general, juniors give the 
same precedence to and show the same deference 
towards their seniors that any courteous person does 
to his elders. 
The formalities comprising military courtesy are 
observed by superiors as well as by subordinates and 
on all occasions should be rendered promptly and 
smartly, for a slovenly and half-hearted execution 
of them is in itself discourteous. 
Military courtesy is indispensable to discipline 
and nothing gives a better indication of the state 
of discipline in an organization than the manner in 
which the formalities of military courtesy are ob- 
served and practiced. 
15 16 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
2-2. Salutes.—(a) The salute is a form of mili- 
tary courtesy that has been strictly and conscien- 
tiously practiced from time immemorial by men of 
arms of all nations. By the salute the individual 
personally pays his respects to the national flag and 
to the uniform and authority of his superiors, and 
acknowledges the salutes of his juniors. When a 
salute is rendered to a senior it signifies not only 
respect for the uniform worn and the office held but 
a friendly greeting; in no way is it to be considered a 
sign of humility or an admission of individual in- 
feriority. When a salute is rendered to the National 
Flag or to the National Anthem of the United States 
of America it implies loyalty to that nation and when 
rendered to the flag or national anthem of a foreign 
country during an exchange of honors it signifies 
an act of friendship. 
(b) How and when to render a proper salute is 
one of the first things a man in the service should 
learn. 
2-3. How to Render the Salute.—This is ex- 
plained in paragraph 4-7. 
2-4. Whom to Salute.—(a) Salutes shall be ex- 
changed (1) between officers and (2) between officers 
and enlisted men on every occasion of their meeting, 
passing near, or being addressed except as hereafter 
indicated. MILITARY COURTESIES 
17 
(b) Salutes and other marks of respect shall be 
extended to officers of the Navy, Army, Marine Corps, 
and Coast Guard, to foreign military and naval 
officers whose governments are formally recognized 
by the government of the United States, and, when 
on active duty, to officers of the Naval, Army, and 
Marine Corps Reserve, and the National Guard. 
2-5. When to Salute.—The occasions which call 
for a salute are many and are contained in Chapter 
5 of U. S. Navy Regulations, but a few simple rules 
will suffice for most occasions. 
Rules for Saluting.—(l) Enlisted men salute the 
commanding officer and all officers senior to him on 
every occasion of meeting, passing near, or being 
addressed by them except when in military forma- 
tion or uncovered, in which cases, they shall stand 
at Attention. 
(2) On board ship enlisted men, if covered and 
not in military formation, salute all officers junior 
to the commanding officer on their first daily meet- 
ing, passing near, or being addressed by them. At 
other times they clear gangway if necessary and 
stand at Attention, facing the officer until he passes. 
(3) Enlisted men shall salute the executive officer 
or any other officer making an official inspection. 
(4) All salutes in passing or approaching are be- 
gun at six paces or at six paces from the nearest 
point of passing, the enlisted man saluting first. 18 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
(5) Officers in civilian dress are saluted in the 
same manner as when in uniform, if recognized’. 
(6) Enlisted men who are passengers in the stern 
sheets of a boat and the coxswain shall rise and salute 
when an officer enters or leaves their boats. 
(7) Men seated in a boat in which there is no petty 
officer or acting petty officer in charge, lying at a 
gangway, landing, or boom shall rise and salute all 
officers passing near; when an officer, petty officer 
or acting petty officer is in charge of the boat he 
alone shall render the salute. 
(8) When addressing or being addressed by an 
officer, the enlisted man salutes at the beginning 
and the close of the conversation. 
(9) Civilian government officials as well as civilian 
representatives of foreign governments when visit- 
ing a naval command in an official capacity are 
accorded the same individual courtesies as are 
extended to officers, 
(10) When in doubt as to the necessity of render- 
ing a salute, the best rule is to render the salute. 
It is much better to render an unnecessary salute 
than to omit one that should have been executed. 
2-6. When the Salute is Omitted.—(a) Men at 
work, except when addressed by an officer or called 
to attention, shall not be required to salute. MILITARY COURTESIES 
19 
(b) A man in formation shall not salute, but if 
addressed by an officer he shall stand at Attention. 
(c) Men seated at work, at games, or at mess are 
not required to rise when an officer other than a 
flag officer or the captain of a ship passes, unless 
they be called to Attention or when it becomes neces- 
sary to clear a gangway. 
(d) Salutes usually are not required when both 
hands are occupied in carrying articles or otherwise 
so occupied as to make saluting impracticable. 
(e) Men uncovered (wearing no headdress) do not 
salute. 
(/) Men seated at oars in a pulling boat are not 
required to rise or salute. 
2-7. Courtesies Other Than the Salute.—(a) 
Assuming the position of Attention is a military 
courtesy frequently called for when the salute is 
not required. The position of Attention is explained 
in paragraph 4-3. 
(b) Attention is executed whenever the command 
ATTENTION is given by anyone authorized to give 
such an order. 
(c) When enlisted men are in a room and an offi- 
cer enters, the first to perceive him calls ATTEN* 
TION, whereupon all rise, uncover (unless under 
arms) and stand at Attention until the officer leaves 
or directs otherwise. 20 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
(d) In general, the position of Attention is 
assumed in lieu of the salute in all circumstances 
calling for a salute but in which the execution of 
the salute is impracticable, as, for example, when 
uncovered or when the hands are otherwise engaged. 
(e) When receiving an order from an officer, a man 
should reply, “Aye, aye, sir.” The expressions “Very 
good, sir” or “Very well, sir” should never be used. 
(/) Enlisted men, not carrying arms, uncover when 
entering officers’ quarters either afloat or ashore. 
2-8. Juniors Give Way to Seniors.—(a) At land- 
ings and gangways juniors shall give way to seniors, 
and at all times juniors shall show deference to 
their seniors by abstaining from crossing the bows 
of their boats, crowding them, or ignoring their 
presence. The same rules shall apply in relations 
ashore, whether in vehicles or on foot. 
(b) Except when excused by proper authority, 
boats shall always haul clear of shore landings and 
ship’s gangways while waiting, and crews shall not 
leave their boats. 
(c) In accompanying other officers, juniors shall 
walk or ride on the left of their seniors, unless there 
be special reason for the contrary. 
id) Unless otherwise directed by the senior officer 
present, officers will enter boats, automobiles, or 
other vehicles in the inverse order of rank and will MILITARY COURTESIES 
21 
leave them in order of rank. The seniors will be 
accorded the most desirable seats. 
2-9. National Anthem.—(a) The composition 
consisting of the words and music known as “The 
Star Spangled Banner” is designated the National 
Anthem of the United States of America. 
(b) Whenever the national anthem is played all 
officers and enlisted men of the Navy shall stand 
at Attention facing the music unless at colors, when 
they shall face the ensign. In boats, only the boat 
officer, or in his absence the coxswain, shall stand 
and salute; other members of the crew and passen- 
gers who are already standing shall stand at Atten- 
tion, all others remain seated. If in uniform, cov- 
ered, they shall salute at the first note of the 
anthem, retaining the position of salute until the 
last note of the anthem. Men in ranks shall salute 
only by command. If not in uniform and covered, 
they shall uncover at the first note of the anthem, 
holding the headdress over the heart and so remain 
until the last note except that in inclement weather 
the headdress may be raised slightly and held above 
the head. 
(c) When played by a naval band, the national 
anthem shall be played through without the repeti- 
tion of any part not required to be repeated to make 
it complete. 22 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
(d) The same marks of respect prescribed for 
observance during the playing of the National 
Anthem of the United States shall be shown toward 
the national anthem of any other country, formally 
recognized by the government of the United States. 
2-10. Salutes to Colors and Quarter-deck.—All 
officers and men, when reaching the quarter-deck 
either from a boat, from a gangway, from the shore, 
or from another part of the ship, shall salute the 
national ensign. In the event that the ensign is 
not hoisted this salute shall be tendered only when 
leaving or coming on board ship. In making this 
salute, which shall be entirely distinct from the 
salute to the officer of the deck, the person making 
it shall stop at the top of the gangway, or upon 
arriving upon the quarter-deck, face the colors, 
and render the salute, after which the officer of the 
deck shall be saluted. In leaving the quarter-deck, 
the same salutes shall be rendered in inverse order. 
The officer of the deck shall return both salutes in 
each case, and shall require that they be properly 
made. 
(b) The commanding officer shall clearly define 
the limits of the quarter-deck; this area shall em- 
brace so much of the main or other appropriate 
deck as may be necessary for the proper conduct 
of official and ceremonial functions. When the MILITARY COURTESIES 
23 
quarter-deck so designated is forward and at a 
considerable distance from the colors, the salute 
to the colors prescribed in the preceding paragraph 
will not be rendered by officers and men except when 
leaving or coming on board the ship. 
(c) The starboard gangways to the quarter-deck 
shall be used by commissioned officers, warrant offi- 
cers, and their visitors; the port gangways shall be 
used by all other persons. If the construction of the 
ship or other circumstances make a change in this 
rule expedient, the change may be made at the dis- 
cretion of the commanding officer. 
(d) The side shall be sufficiently lighted to enable 
persons to go on board or take their departure with- 
out inconvenience. 
2-11. The National Ensign.—(a) The flag known 
as “The Stars and Stripes” is also known as the Na- 
tional Ensign and the National Colors of the United 
States of America. 
(b) When passing or being passed by the uncased 
colors, honors are rendered in the same manner as 
when the national anthem is being played. 
(c) The word “colors” also implies the regimental 
or battalion colors when accompanied by the na- 
tional ensign. 
(d) No ship of the Navy shall dip her ensign un- 
less in return for such compliment. Of the colors 24 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
carried by a naval force on shore only the battalion 
or regimental colors shall be dipped in rendering or 
acknowledging a salute. 
2-12. Military Funeral.—(a) At a military fu- 
neral, all persons in the naval service attending in 
an individual capacity will stand at Attention, un- 
cover, and hold the headdress over the heart at any 
time when the casket is being moved by the casket 
bearers and during the services at the grave, includ- 
ing the firing of the volley and the sounding of taps. 
During inclement weather if in civilian clothes the 
headdress may be raised slightly above the head. If 
in uniform during inclement weather, they may 
remain covered and execute the hand salute when 
the casket is being moved by the casket bearers and 
during the firing of the volley and the sounding of 
taps. CHAPTER 111 
PHYSICAL DRILL 
Section I.—FORMATION 
3-1. (a) The formation given in this section Is 
recommended for physical drill, it being the sim- 
plest and least complicated, and more compact than 
any other. The unit to be drilled is formed in 
column of threes or fours at close interval facing 
the instructor. In restricted spaces, as on board 
ship, it may be formed in column of twos. 
(b) At the command: 1. extend to the left, 
2. MARCH, the right squad (file) stands fast, with 
arms extended sideways. The second, third, and 
fourth squads (files) from the right turn to the left 
and, at double time, run forward to the original left, 
the second squad (file) taking two paces, the third 
taking four paces, and the fourth taking six paces. 
All face to the front after taking the required dis- 
tance, with arms extended sideways, the distance be- 
tween the fingertips to be about 12 inches. 
(c) At the command: 1. arms, 2. DOWN, the arms 
are lowered smartly to the sides. The men within 
each file are now covering in column at 40 inches 
distance and are too close to carry out the exercise. 
25 26 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
(d) At the command: 1. even numbers to the 
right (left), 2. MOVE, each even-numbered man 
stride-jumps to the right, squarely in the middle of 
the interval. In doing this he swings his right leg 
sideways, jumps from his left foot, and alights on 
his right foot, bringing the left smartly into position 
against the right. 
(e) To assemble, the instructor commands: 1. 
assemble, 2. MARCH. At the command MARCH 
all return to their original positions in column on 
the double. 
Section 2.—THE DRILL 
3-2. (a) General.—All movements hereinafter 
described should be first carefully explained, laying 
stress upon their principal objects. 
(5) The instructor should then illustrate each 
position or exercise until thoroughly understood by 
the class. 
(c) The starting positions.—(l) After executing 
the starting positions by command, they may be 
repeated as many times as desired by giving the 
caution: by the numbers, and then substituting for 
the commands of execution given the first time, the 
numbers: ONE, TWO, ONE, TWO, and so on, or 
ONE, TWO, THREE, FOUR, ONE, TWO, THREE, 
FOUR, and so on, as appropriate. PHYSICAL DRILL 
27 
(2) When movements are executed to both left 
and right, sufficient numbers are used to complete 
the movement to both sides. 
(3) For common faults in the combined starting 
positions of the arms and legs, see the references 
indicated. 
(d) Exercises.—(l) In conducting exercises, the 
starting position is taken on command; each move- 
ment is then executed on command; each move- 
ment may then be repeated by giving the caution 
and numbers as in subpar. (c) (1) of par. 3-2. 
(2) When an exercise is executed to both sides, 
it should be first conducted to the left and then 
repeated to the right. 
(3) When an exercise is not completed in the 
standing position the standing position is resumed 
on command. 
(4) For common faults, see references indicated. 
3-3. The Standing Position.—(a) The standing 
position is the position of Attention (see par. 4-3) 
and is taken at the command; ATTENTION, or as 
hereinafter prescribed. 
(b) The position of Attention is very important as 
all exercises start from and usually end in it. In- 
structors should criticize the position of Attention 
with such remarks as head up, chin in, chest high, 
KNEES STRAIGHT, etc. 
486912°—43 3 28 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Starting positions of the arms. 
3-4. Wing Standing Position.—(a) Command: 1. 
hips, 2. FIRM. Arms are bent upward; hands placed 
on hips, fingers to the front, thumbs to the rear; 
palms of hands turned inward and pressing against 
ridge of hip bone; elbows pointing out to the side and 
slightly drawn back. 
(b) Standing Position.—Command: 1. arms down- 
ward, 2. STRETCH. Arms are stretched downward 
with force the shortest way. 
(c) Common faults: (1) Elbows drawn back too 
much and not pointed to the side; (2) Hands not 
firm on the hips. 
3-5. Yard Standing Position.—(a) Command: 1. 
arms sideways, 2. RAISE. Arms, fully stretched, are 
slowly raised sideways to the horizontal; thumbs and 
fingers extended and joined; palms turned down- 
ward. 
(b) Standing Position.—Command: 1. arms down- 
ward, 2. SINK. Arms are slowly lowered sideways 
to the sides. 
(c) Common faults: (1) Arms not held in the 
horizontal position; (2) Chest relaxed and not held 
high. 
3-6. Reach Standing Position.—(a) Command: 1. 
arms forward, 2. RAISE. Arms, fully stretched, are 
slowly raised forward to the horizontal; thumbs and PHYSICAL DRILL 
29 
fingers extended and joined; palms turned inward 
toward each other. 
(5) Standing Position.—Command: 1. arms down- 
ward, 2. SINK. Arms are slowly lowered forward to 
the sides. 
(c) Common faults: In addition to those in par. 
3-5 (c); (3) Palms not turned inward. 
3-7. Bend Standing Position.—(a) Command; 1. 
arms, 2. BEND. Arms are bent up quickly at the 
elbows; palms toward shoulders; fingers touching 
points of the shoulders; elbows drawn back and down 
to the sides. 
(b) Standing Position.—Command: arms down- 
ward, 2. STRETCH. Arms are stretched down to 
the sides with force the shortest way. 
(c) Common faults: (1) Shoulders not back and 
square to the front; (2) Elbows not drawn in to the 
sides; (3) Fingers not resting on the shoulders. 
3-8. Forward Bend Standing Position.—(a) Com- 
mand: 1. arms forward, 2. BEND. Arms are bent 
quickly upward in front of the chest; elbows at height 
of shoulders and drawn well back; thumbs and fingers 
extended and joined; palms down, wrist and fore- 
arm in a straight line. 
(5) Standing Position.—Command; 1. arms down- 
ward, 2. STRETCH. Arms are stretched down to 
the sides with force the shortest way. 30 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
(c) Common faults: (1) Elbows not at height of 
shoulders and not drawn back enough; (2) Shoulders 
carried forward; (3) Wrist and forearm not in a 
straight line. 
3-9. Stretch Standing Position. (Two methods, 
(1) and (2)).—(a) Command: (1) 1. arms forward 
and upward, 2. RAISE. Arms, fully stretched, are 
raised forward and upward to the vertical position; 
palms turned inward, shoulder width apart; thumbs 
and fingers extended and joined. Command; (2) 1. 
arms sideways and upward, 2. RAISE. Arms are 
raised sideways to the yard standing position (par. 
3-5), the hands are then quickly turned upward 
and the movement continued upward. 
(b) Standing Position.—(Two methods, (1) and 
(2) —Command: (1) 1. arms forward and down- 
ward, 2. SINK. Arms are slowly lowered in the re- 
verse manner to the sides. Command: (2) 1. arms 
sideways and downward, 2. SINK. Arms are slowly 
lowered in the reverse manner to the sides. 
(c) Common faults: (1) Arms not held straight 
and not in line with the trunk; (2) Palms not held 
shoulder width apart. 
3-10. Rest Standing Position.—(a) Command’ 
1. neck, 2. REST. Arms are bent quickly at the el- 
bows, carried up the shortest way; hands are placed 
in back of the neck, palms to the front, thumbs PHYSICAL DRILL 
31 
and fingers extended and joined, finger tips touching 
each other; elbows well back; chest high; head 
erect. 
(b) Standing Position.—Command: 1. arms down- 
ward, 2. STRETCH. Arms are stretched down to 
the sides with force the shortest way. 
(c) Common faults: (1> Head carried forward 
during arm movement; (2) Elbows not carried back 
far enough; (3) Fingers interlocking. 
3-11. Palm Standing Position.—(a) Command: 
1. hands outward, 2. TURN. With the arms fully 
stretched and held close to the body, the palms are 
turned forward and outward away from the body 
as far as possible. 
(b) Standing Position.—Command: 1. hands in- 
ward, 2. TURN. Hands are turned inward toward 
the body. 
(c) Common faults: (1) Arms not held close to 
the body; (2) Shoulders carried forward. 
Starting positions of the legs. 
3-12. Close Standing Position.—(a) Command: 
1. feet, 2. CLOSE. By slightly raising toes from the 
deck and pivoting on heels, the feet are carried in- 
ward so inner sides of feet touch. 
(b) Standing Position.—Command: 1. feet, 2. 
OPEN. By pivoting on heels, the feet are turned 
out to the standing position. 32 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
(c) Common faults: (1) Body bent forward at the 
waist line; (2) Feet dragging deck while closing and 
opening. 
3-13. Outward Walk Standing Position.—(a) 
Command: 1. left (right) foot outward, 2. PLACE. 
The designated foot is placed two foot-lengths out- 
ward (45 degrees to the front); weight of body 
equally distributed on both feet; shoulders square 
to the front. 
(b) Standing Position.—Command: 1. feet to- 
gether, 2. PLACE. By pushing from deck with 
outward foot, it is carried back to the standing 
position. 
(c) Common faults: (1) Shoulders not square to 
the front; (2) Feet sliding along deck; (3) Angle be- 
tween feet not maintained; (4) Weight not equally 
distributed. 
3-14. Forward Walk Standing Position.—(a) 
Command: 1. left (right) foot forward, 2. PLACE. 
The designated foot is placed two foot-lengths di- 
rectly forward: weight of body equally distributed 
on both feet; shoulders square to the front. 
(b) Standing Position.—Command: 1. feet to- 
gether, 2. PLACE. By pushing from deck with for- 
ward foot, it is carried back to the standing position. 
(c) Common faults: In addition to those in par. 
3-13(c): (5) Designated foot not placed directly 
forward. PHYSICAL DRILL 
33 
3-15. Outward Lunge Standing Position.—(a) 
Command; 1. left (right) foot outward, 2. 
LUNGE. The designated foot is placed 3 foot- 
lengths outward (45 degrees to the front); outward 
knee directly over foot and bent to a right angle; 
both feet flat on deck; rear leg, trunk, and head in 
a straight line 45 degrees to the front. 
(b) Standing Position.—Command: 1. feet to- 
gether, 2. PLACE. By pushing from deck with out- 
ward foot, it is carried back to the standing position. 
(c) Common faults: (1) Not stepping out 3 foot- 
lengths; (2) Feet not flat on deck; (3) Rear leg, 
body and head not in a straight line. 
3-16. Forward Lunge Standing Position.—(a) 
Command: 1. left (right) foot forward, 2. LUNGE. 
The designated foot is placed 3 foot-lengths forward; 
forward knee is directly over foot and bent to a right 
angle; both feet flat on deck; rear leg, trunk, and 
head in a straight line to the front; shoulders square 
to the front. 
(b) Standing Position.—Command: 1. feet to- 
gether, 2. PLACE. By pushing off from deck with 
forward foot, it is carried back to the standing posi- 
tion. 
(c) Common faults: In addition to those in par. 
3-15 (c): (4) Designated foot not placed directly for- 
ward; (5) Heel of the rear foot raised from deck. 34 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
3-17. Stride Standing Position. (Three methods, 
(1) (2), and (3).—(a) Command: (1). left 
(right) foot sideways, 2. PLACE. The designated 
foot is carried directly sideways 2 foot-lengths; 
weight of body equally distributed on both feet. 
Command: (2) 1. feet sideways, 2. PLACE (two mo- 
tions) . Left foot is carried 1 foot-length to the left; 
right foot is then carried 1 foot-length to the right.) 
Command; (3) 1. feet sideways with a jump, 2. 
PLACE. By pushing off from deck and springing 
upward, legs are parted sideways and feet are planted 
on deck 2 foot-lengths apart. 
(b) Standing Position (Three methods, (1), (2), 
and (3)).—Command: (1) 1. feet together, 2. 
PLACE. Foot which was placed sideways is carried 
back to the standing position. Command: (2) 1. 
feet together, 2. PLACE (two motions). Left foot 
is carried in 1 foot-length; right foot is then carried 
to the standing position. Command: (3) 1. feet 
together with a jump, 2. PLACE. By pushing off 
from deck and springing upward, both feet are car- 
ried to the standing position. 
(c) Common faults: (1) Stride not long enough; 
(2) Body swaying; (3) Sliding feet on deck. 
3-18. Toe Standing Position.—(a) Command; 1. 
heels, 2. RAISE. With heels together and arms held 
to the sides, the body is raised as high as possible on PHYSICAL DRILL 
35 
the toes, maintaining the balance; chest held high; 
head erect. 
(b) Standing Position.—Command; 1. heels, 2. 
SINK. Heels are lowered to deck. 
(c) Common faults: (1) Body swaying; (2) Heels 
not held together. 
3-19. Spring Standing Position.—(a) Command: 
1. heels, 2. RAISE (see par. 3-18(a)), 3. knees, 4. 
BEND. Maintaining balance, knees are bent down- 
ward until upper legs and lower legs are at right 
angles to each other; position of rest of body is 
unaltered. 
(b) Standing Position.—Command: 1. knees, 2. 
STRETCH (keeping heels clear of deck, knees are 
stretched upward), 3. heels, 4. SINK (see par. 
3-18(b)). 
(c) Common faults: (1) Heels lowered during 
knee bending and stretching; (2) Body swaying. 
3-20. Spring Sitting Position.—(a) Command: 
1. heels, 2. RAISE (see par. 3-18(a)), 3. knees to 
sitting, 4. BEND. Maintaining balance, knees are 
bent downward until the buttocks touch the heels; 
position of rest of body is unaltered. 
(b) .Standing Position.—Command: 1. knees, 2. 
STRETCH, 3. heels, 4. SINK (see par. 3-19(b)). 
(c) Common faults: In addition to those in par. 
3-19(c): (3) Knees not bent enough. 36 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Starting positions of the trunk. 
3-21. Stoop Standing Position.— (a) Command; 
1. trunk forward, 2. BEND. With knees straight 
and arms at the sides, the trunk is slowly lowered 
forward to the horizontal so that trunk and legs form 
a right angle. 
(b) Standing Position.—Command; 1. trunk up- 
ward, 2. STRETCH. Trunk is raised slowly upward 
to the standing position. 
(c) Common faults: (1) Back rounded; (2) Head 
allowed to fall forward; (3) Chin not drawn in; 
(4) Knees not held straight. 
3-22. Arch Standing Position.—(a) Command: 
1. trunk backward, 2. BEND. With knees straight 
and arms at the sides, the trunk is bent slowly back- 
ward, bending taking place in upper spine; chest 
helc? high; chin drawn in. 
(b) Standing Position.—Command; 1. trunk up- 
ward, 2. STRETCH. Trunk is raised slowly upward 
to the standing position. 
(c) Common faults: (1) Bending the lower spine; 
(2) Head allowed to fall backward; (3) Chin not 
drawn in. 
3-23. Twist Standing Position.—(a) Command; 
1. trunk to the left (right) ,2. TWIST. With arms 
at the sides, the trunk is slowly twisted above the PHYSICAL DRILL 
37 
hips, not in the thighs, to the designated side as 
far as possible; hips square to the front. 
(b) Standing Position.—Command; 1. trunk for- 
ward, 2. TWIST. Trunk is slowly twisted forward 
to the standing position. 
(c) Common faults: (1) Twisting thighs or neck 
instead of trunk; (2) Hips not square to the front. 
3-24. Side Bend Standing Position.—(a) Com- 
mand: 1. TRUNK TO THE LEFT (RIGHT), 2. BEND. 
With arms at the sides, chin drawn in, and feet firm 
on the deck, the trunk is slowly bent to the desig- 
nated side as far as possible. Position of head is 
unaltered in relation to trunk. 
(b) Standing Position.—Command: 1. trunk up- 
ward, 2. STRETCH. Trunk is slowly raised upward 
to the standing position. 
(c) Common faults: (1) Raising foot off the deck; 
(2) Head not in line with spine; (3) Twisting the 
trunk. 
Miscellaneous starting, positions. 
3-25. Crouch Sitting Position.—(a) Command; 
1. crouch sitting, 2. PLACE. Knees are bent to sit- 
ting as in par. 3-20(a); hands are placed on deck 
between knees, keeping them shoulder width apart; 
head held high; back straight. 38 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
(b) Standing Position.—Command: 1. ATTEN- 
TION. By pushing from deck with hands and 
stretching knees, the body is straightened up to the 
standing position. 
(c) Common faults: (1) Back rounded; (2) Head 
carried forward. 
3-26. Stoop Palling Position.—(a) Command: 
1. stoop falling, 2. PLACE (two motions; Execute 
crouch sitting as in par. 3-25(a); Weight of body is 
taken on the arms and, without sliding foot along 
the deck, legs are stretched backward with force, 
toes placed on the deck so that body is in an inclined 
position, arms straight, legs, trunk, and head in a 
straight line). 
(b) Standing Position.—Command: ATTENTION 
(two motions: By pushing from deck with toes, the 
legs are brought forward to the crouch sitting posi- 
tion; come to attention as in par. 3-25 (b)). 
(c) Common faults: (1) Legs and trunk not in 
a straight line, allowing back to sway or hips to 
raise; (2) Sliding feet along'the deck. 
3-27. Back Stoop Falling Position.— (a) Com- 
mand: 1. stoop falling, 2. PLACE (see par. 3-26 
(a)), 3. BACK STOOP FALLING ON LEFT (RIGHT) ARM, 4. 
TURN. By keeping designated arm and both legs 
straight, the body is turned on designated arm and 
foot; free hand placed on the deck about 18 inches PHYSICAL DRILL 
39 
from the other hand; back toward deck; heels on 
deck; body in an inclined position; legs, trunk and 
head in a straight line. 
(b) Standing Position.—Command: 1. stoop fall- 
ing on THE LEFT (right) arm, 2. TURN (the body is 
turned on designated arm and foot back to the 
stoop falling position), 3. ATTENTION (see par 
3-26 (b)). 
(c) Common faults: In addition to those in par. 
3-25 (c) and 3-26 (c); (5) Arms not held straight; 
(6) Body allowed to hinge at waistline; (7) Head 
carried forward and not in line with trunk. 
3-28. Side Palling Position.—(a) Command: 1. 
stoop falling, 2. PLACE (see par. 2-26 (a)), 3. side 
FALLING ON LEFT (RIGHT) ARM, 4. TURN. Body is 
turned on designated arm and foot until designated 
side of body is turned toward deck; free arm at the 
side; supporting arm straight; body in an inclined 
position; legs, trunk, and head in a straight line. 
(b) Standing Position.—Command: 1. stoop fall- 
ing ON THE LEFT (RIGHT) ARM, 2. TURN (body is 
turned on designated arm and foot back to the stoop 
falling position), 3. ATTENTION (see par 3-26 
(b)). 
(c) Common faults: (1) Body and arm not held 
straight: (2) Head held to the side; (3) Chin not 
drawn in; (4) Legs not together. 40 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
3-29. Lying Position.—(a) Command: 1. Stoop 
falling, 2. PLACE (see par. 3-26 (a)), 3. lying on 
the LEFT (right) arm, 4. TURN. Body is turned on 
designated arm and foot to the back stoop falling 
position, as in par. 3-27 (a), then immediately low- 
ered to the deck so that back of body is flat on the 
deck; arms at the sides; legs together. 
(b) Standing Position.—Command: 1. stoop fall- 
ing on the left (right) arm, 2. TURN (body is turned 
on designated arm and foot to the stoop falling posi- 
tion), 3. ATTENTION (see par. 3-26 (b)). 
(c) Common faults: (1) Legs apart, (2) Arms not 
at the side. 
3-30. Forward Lying Position.—(a) Command: 
1. stoop falling, 2. PLACE (see par. 3-26 (a)), 3. for- 
ward lying, 4. PLACE. Body is quickly lowered to 
the deck and arms placed at the sides; chin drawn 
in; legs together. 
(b) Standing Position.—Command: 1. stoop fall- 
ing, 2. PLACE (hands are placed on the deck as in 
stoop falling position and arms are straightened, 
raising body to the stoop falling position), 3. ATTEN- 
TION (see par. 3-26 (b)). 
(c) Common faults: (1) Front of body not flat on 
deck; (2) Arms not at the sides; (3) Legs apart; 
(4) Chin not drawn in. PHYSICAL DRILL 
41 
3-31. Stride Kneeling Position.—(a) Command: 
1. stride kneeling, 2. PLACE (two motions: Right 
knee is bent, left knee placed on the deck about 6 
inches to left of right foot, half kneeling; right knee 
is placed on the deck so that distance between knees 
is about 12 inches, body, from the knees up, held 
straight, hsels together). 
(b) Standing Position.—Command: ATTENTION 
(two motions: Left knee is raised, left foot placed 
on the deck opposite right knee, both hands are 
placed on left knee; by stretching knees, body is 
raised to the standing position and arms are lowered 
to the sides). 
(c) Common faults: (1) Body hinged at waist- 
line; (2) Touching deck with hands in taking the 
position; (3) Heels not together when in kneeling 
position. 
Combined starting positions of the arms and legs. 
3-32. Wing Stride Standing Position.—(a) Com- 
mand: 1. LEFT (RIGHT) FOOT SIDEWAYS AND HIPS, 2. 
FIRM. Simultaneously execute the movements as 
prescribed in pars. 3-17 (a) (1) and 3-4 (a). 
(b) Standing Position.—Command: 1. feet to- 
gether and arms downward, 2. STRETCH. Simul- 
taneously execute the movements as prescribed in 
pars, 3-17 (b) (1) and 3-4 (b), 42 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
3-33. Bend Toe Standing Position.—(a) Com- 
mand: 1. heels raising and arms, 2. BEND. Simul- 
taneously execute the movements as prescribed in 
pars. 3-18 (a) and 3-7 (a). 
(b) Standing Position.—Command: 1. heels 
sinking and arms downward, 2. STRETCH. Simul- 
taneously execute the movements as prescribed in 
pars. 3-18 (b) and 3-7 (b). 
3-34. Rest Outward Walk Standing Position.— 
(a) Command: 1. left (right) foot outward place 
and neck. 2. REST. Simultaneously execute the 
movements as prescribed in pars. 3-13 (a) and 
3-10 (a). 
(b) Standing Position.—Command: 1. feet to- 
gether and arms downward, 2. STRETCH. Simul- 
taneously execute the movements as prescribed in 
pars. 3-13 (b) and 3-10 (b). 
3-35. Stretch Outward Lunge Standing Posi- 
tion.—(a) Command: 1. left (right) foot outward 
lunging and arms upward, 2. RAISE. Simultane- 
ously execute the movements as prescribed in pars. 
3-15 (a) and 3-9 (a) (1). 
(b) Standing Position.—Command: 1. feet to- 
gether and arms forward and downward, 2. SINK. 
Simultaneously execute the movements as prescribed 
in pars. 3-15 (b) and 3-9 (b) (1). PHYSICAL DRILL 
43 
(c) The stretch position can also be taken on 
appropriate commands by raising the arms sideways 
and upwards. (See pars. 3-9 (a) (2) and (b) (2).) 
Exercises of the iegs, from the starting positions. 
3-36. Wing Standing; Heel Raising.—(a) Starting 
Position.—Command: 1. hips. 2. FIRM (see par. 
3-4 (a)). 
(b) Exercise.—Command: 1. heels, 2. RAISE, 3. 
heels, 4. SINK (see par. 3-18), 5. by the numbers, 
6. ONE, 7. TWO, and so on. 
(c) Standing Position.—Command: 1. arms down- 
ward, 2. STRETCH (see par. 3-4 (b)). 
3-37. Yard, Stride Standing; Heel Raising.—(a) 
Starting Position.—Command: 1. left (right) foot 
SIDEWAYS AND ARMS SIDEWAYS, 2. RAISE (566 pai’S. 
3-17 (a) (1) and 3-5 (a)). 
(b) Exercise.—Command: 1. heels, 2. RAISE, 3. 
heels, 4. SINK (see par. 3-18), 5. by the numbers, 
6. ONE, 7. TWO, and so on. 
(c) Standing Position.—Command: 1. feet to- 
gether and arms downward, 2. SINK (see pars. 
3-17 (b) (1) and 3-5 (b)). 
3-38. Wing, Outward Walk Standing; Heel Rais- 
ing.— (a) Starting Position.—Command: 1. left 
(right) foot outward, hips, 2. FIRM (see pars. 
3-13 (a) and 3-4 (a). 
486912 —43 4 44 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
(b) Exercise.—Command: 1. heels, 2. RAISE. 3. 
heels, 4. SINK (see par. 3-18), 5. by the numbers, 
6. ONE, 7. TWO, and so on. 
(c) Standing Position.—Command: 1. feet to- 
gether and arms downward, 2. STRETCH (see pars. 
3-13 (b) and 3-4 (b)). 
3-39. Yard, Forward Walk Standing; Heel Rais- 
ing.—(a) Starting Position.—Command: 1. left 
(right) foot forward and arms sideways, 2. RAISE 
(see pars. 3-14 (a) and 3-5 (a)). 
(b) Exercise.—Command: 1 heels, 2. RAISE, 3 
heels, 4. SINK (see par. 3-18), 5. by the numbers, 6. 
ONE, 7. TWO, and so on. 
(c) Standing Position.—Command: 1. feet to- 
gether AND ARMS DOWNWARD, 2. SINK (566 pai’S. 
3-14 (b) and 3-5 (b)). 
3-40. Wing Standing; Heel Raising and Knee 
Bending.— (a) Starting Position.—Command: 1. 
hips, 2. FIRM (see par. 3-4 (a)). 
(b) Exercise.—Command: 1. heels, 2. RAISE, 3. 
knees, 4. BEND, 5. knefs, 6. STRETCH, 7. heels, 8. 
SINK (see par. 3-19), 9. by the numbers, 10. ONE, 
11. TWO, 12. THREE, 13. POUR, and so on. 
(c) Standing Position.—Command; 1. arms down- 
ward, 2. STRETCH (see par. 3-4 (b)). 
3-41. Yard Standing; Heel Raising and Knee 
Bending to Sitting.—(a) Starting Position.—Com- 
mand: 1. arms sideways, 2. RAISE (see par. 3-5 (a)). PHYSICAL DRILL 
45 
(b) Exercise.—Command: 1. heels, 2. RAISE, 3. 
KNEES TO SITTING, 4. BEND, 5. KNEES, 6. STRETCH, 
7. heels, 8. SINK, (see par. 3-20), 9. by the numbers, 
10. ONE, 11. TWO, 12. THREE, 13. FOUR, and so on. 
(c) Standing Position.—Command: 1. arms down- 
ward, 2. SINK (see par. 3-5 (b)). 
3-42. Wing Standing; Lunging Outward.—(a) 
Starting Position.—Command: 1. hips, 2. FIRM (see 
par. 3-4 (a)). 
(b) Exercise.—Command: 1. left foot outward, 
2. LUNGE, 3. feet together, 4. PLACE, 5. right foot 
outward, 6. LUNGE, 7. feet together, 8. PLACE 
(see par. 3-15), 9. by the numbers, 10. ONE, 11. 
TWO, 12. THREE, 13. FOUR, and so on. 
(c) Standing Position.—Command: 1. arms down- 
ward, 2. STRETCH (see par. 3-4 (b)). 
3-43. Bend Standing; Lunging Forward.—(a) 
Starting Position.—Command: 1. arms, 2. BEND (see 
par. 3-7 (a)). 
(b) Exercise.—Command: 1. left foot forward, 
2. LUNGE, 3. feet together, 4. PLACE, 5. right foot 
FORWARD, 6. LUNGE, 7. FEET TOGETHER, 8. PLACE (see 
par. 3-16), 9. by the numbers, 10. ONE, 11. TWO, 
12. THREE, 13. FOUR, and so on. 
(c) Standing Position.—Command: 1. arms down- 
ward, 2. STRETCH (see par. 3-7 (b)). 46 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
3-44. Wing Standing; Advance by Lunging For- 
ward.—(a) Starting Position.—Command: 1. hips, 
2. FIRM (see par. 3-4 (a)). 
(b) Exercise.—Command: 1. advancing forward 
BY THE NUMBERS, 2. ONE, 3. TWO, 4. THREE, 5. 
FOUR, and so on. At the command one, the left 
foot is placed forward as in par. 3-16 (a); at TWO 
the right foot is placed alongside the left; at THREE 
the right foot is placed forward; at FOUR the left 
foot is placed alongside the right, and so on. Then 
the class is faced about, the exercise repeated, and 
the class is faced about again. 
(c) Standing Position.—Command: 1. arms down- 
ward, 2. STRETCH (see par. 3-4 (b)). 
id) Additional common faults: The class not 
working in unison and not keeping the proper dress 
in ranks while advancing. 
Exercises of the arms, from the starting positions. 
3-45. Standing; Arm Stretching Sideways.— 
(a) Exercise.—Command: 1. arms sideways, 2. 
STRETCH (two motions; Arms are bent upward 
to the bend position as in par. 3-7 ia); Arms are 
stretched sideways to the horizontal with force, 
palms turned down), 3. arms downward, 4. STRETCH 
(two motions: Arms are carried to the bend position 
with a snap; Arms are stretched downward with PHYSICAL DRILL 
47 
force to the sides), 5. by the numbers, 6. ONE, 7. 
TWO, 8. THREE, 9. FOUR, and so on. 
Note.—The pause at the bend position is very short. 
(b) Common faults: (1) Arms not fully stretched; 
(2) Palms not turned down; (3) Not enough snap 
and effort in the bending movement. 
3-46. Standing; Arm Stretching Upward.—(a) 
Exercise.—Command: 1. arms upward, 2. STRETCH 
(two motions: Arms are bent upward as in par. 
3-7 (a) ; Arms are stretched upward with force to 
the vertical position; palms turned inward, shoulder 
width apart), 3. arms downward, 4. STRETCH (two 
motions: Arms are carried to the bend position with 
a snap; Arms are stretched downward with force to 
the sides), 5. by the numbers, 6. ONE, 7. TWO, 8. 
THREE, 9. FOUR, and so on. 
Note.—The pause at the bend position is very short. 
(b) Common faults: (1) Arms not stretched up- 
ward with force; (2) Palms not turned inward and 
shoulder width apart. 
3-47. Standing; Arm Stretching Forward.—(a) 
Exercise.—Command: 1. arms forward, 2. STRETCH 
(two motions: Arms are bent upward as in par. 
3-7 (a); Arms are stretched forward to the hori- 
zontal position with force, palms turned inward, 
shoulder width apart), 3. arms downward, 4. 48 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
STRETCH (two motions: Arms are carried to the 
bend position with a snap; Arms are stretched 
downward with force to the sides), 5. by the num- 
bers, 6. ONE, 7. TWO, 8. THREE, 9. FOUR, and so on. 
Note—The pause at the bend position is very short. 
3-48. Standing; Arm Stretching Backward.— 
(a) Exercise.—Command: 1. arms backward, 2. 
STRETCH (two motions: Arms are bent upward 
as in par. 3-7 (a); Arms are stretched downward 
and backward with force, palms turned inward, 
shoulder width apart), 3. arms downward, 4. 
STRETCH (two motions: Arms are carried to the 
bend position with a snap; Arms are stretched down- 
ward with force to the sides), 5. by the numbers, 
6. ONE, 7. TWO, 8. THREE, 9. FOUR, and so on. 
(b) Common faults: (1) Head carried forward as 
arms are stretched backward; (2) Arms not carried 
back far enough. 
3-49. Forward Bend Standing; Arm Striking Side- 
WAys.—(a) Starting Position.—Command: 1. arms 
forward, 2. BEND (see par. 3—B (a)). 
(b) Exercise.—Command: 1. arms sideways, 2. 
STRIKE (Arms are stretched sideways with force to 
the yard position; upper arms in a firm position), 3. 
Note.—The pause at the bend position is very short. PHYSICAL DRILL 
49 
ARMS forward, 4. BEND (Arms are carried with force 
to the first position), 5. by the numbers, 6. ONE, 7. 
TWO, and so on. 
(c) Standing Position.—Command; 1. arms down- 
ward, 2. STRETCH (see par. 3-8 (b)). 
3-50. Bend Standing; Arm Stretching in Various 
Directions.—(a) Starting Position.—Command: 1. 
ARMS, 2. BEND (see par. 3-7 (a)). 
(b) Exercise.—Command: 1. arms sideways, 2. 
STRETCH (see par. 3-45), 3. arms. 4. BEND, 5. arms, 
upward, 6. STRETCH (see par. 3-46), 7. arms, 8. 
BEND, 9. ARMS FORWARD, 10. STRETCH (see par. 
3-47), 11. arms, 12. BEND, 13. arms backward, 14. 
STRETCH (see par. 3-48), 15. arms, 16. BEND, 17. 
BY THE numbers, 18. ONE, 19. TWO, 20. THREE, 21. 
POUR, 22. FIVE, 23. SIX, 24. SEVEN, 25. EIGHT, and 
so on. 
(c) Standing Position.—Command: 1. arms down- 
ward, 2. STRETCH (see par. 3-7 (b)). 
3-51. Reach Standing; Arm Swinging Upward 
and Forward.— (a) Starting Positio?i.—Command: 1. 
arms forward, 2. RAISE (see par. 3-6 (a)). 
ib) Exercise.—Command: 1. arms upward, 2. 
SWING (Arms are swung upward to the stretch posi- 
tion) , 3. arms forward, 4. SWING (Arms are swung 
forward to the reach position), 5. by the numbers, 6. 
ONE, 7. TWO, and so on. 50 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
(c) Standing Position.—Command: 1. arms down- 
ward, 2. SINK (see par. 3-6 (b)). 
3-52. Stretch Standing; Arm Swinging Forward 
and Upward.—(a) Starting Position.—Command: 1. 
ARMS FORWARD and upward, 2. RAISE (see par. 3-9 
(a) (D). 
(b) Exercise.—Command: 1. arms forward, 2. 
SWING (Arms are swung forward to the reach posi- 
tion), 3. arms upward, 4. SWING (Arms are swung 
upward to the stretch position), 5. by the numbers, 
6. ONE, 7. TWO, and so on. 
(c) Standing Position.—Command: 1. arms for- 
ward and downward, 2. SINK (see par. 3-9 (b) (1)). 
3-53. Reach Standing; Arm Swinging Sideways.— 
(a) Starting Position.—Command: 1. arms forward, 
2. RAISE (see par. 3-6 (a)). 
(b) Exercise.—Command: 1. arms sideways, 2. 
SWING (Arms are swung sideways to the yard posi- 
tion, palms turned downward), 3. arms forward, 4. 
SWING (Arms are swung forward to the reach posi- 
tion, palms turned inward), 5. by the numbers, 6. 
ONE, 7. TWO, and so on. 
Standing Position.—Command: 1. arms downward, 
SINK (see par. 3-6 (b). 
(d) Common faults: (1) Head carried forward 
during the arms swinging sideways. PHYSICAL DRILL 
51 
3-54. Yard Standing; Arm Swinging Forward.— 
(a) Starting Position.—Command: 1. arms sideways, 
2. RAISE (see par. 3-5 (a)). 
(b) Exercise.—Command: 1. arms forward, 2. 
SWING (Arms are swung forward to the reach posi- 
tion, palms turned inward), 3. arms sideways, 4. 
SWING (Arms are swung sideways to the yard posi- 
tion) , 5. by the numbers, 6. ONE, 7. TWO, and so on. 
(c) Standing Position.—Command: 1. arms down- 
ward, 2. SINK (see par. 3-5 (b)). 
(d) Common faults: (1) Head carried forward 
during the arms swinging sideways. 
3-55. Standing; Arm Swinging Forward and Up- 
ward.—(a) Exercise.—Command: 1. arms forward 
and upward, 2. SWING (Arms are swung forward 
and upward), 3. arms forward and downward, 4. 
SWING (Arms are swung forward and downward 
to the standing position), 5. by the numbers, 6. 
ONE, 7. TWO, and so on. 
(b) Common faults: (1) Arms not held straight 
and not shoulder width apart; (2) Arms allowed to 
swing beyond thighs in the downward swing. 
3-56. Standing; Arm Swinging Sideways and Up- 
ward.—(a) Exercise.—Command: 1. arms sideways 
and upward, 2. SWING (Arms are swung sideways 
and upward to the stretch position, turning palms 
up while passing the yard position), 3. arms sideways 52 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
and downward, 4. SWING (Arms are swung sideways 
and downward to the standing position, turning 
palms down while passing the yard position), 5. by 
the numbers, 6. ONE, 7. TWO, and so on. 
(b) Common faults: In addition to those in par. 
3-55: (3) Arms allowed to slap thighs in the down- 
ward swing. 
3-57. Standing; Arm Circling with a Swing.—(a) 
Exercise.—Command: 1. arms forward and upward, 
2. SWING (Arms are swung forward and upward 
to the stretch position), 3. arms sideways and down- 
ward, 4. SWING (Arms are swung sideways and 
downward to the standing position, turning the 
palms down while passing the yard position), 5. by 
the numbers, 6. ONE, 7. TWO, and so on. 
3-58. Half Stretch Standing; Arm Changing with 
a Swing.—(a) Starting Position.—Command: 1. 
LEFT (RIGHT) ARM FORWARD AND UPWARD, 2. RAISE 
(see par. 3-9 (a) (1)). 
(b) Exercise.—Command: 1. arm changing with a 
swing by the numbers, 2. ONE (Arm above head is 
swung forward and downward and at same time 
other arm is swung forward and upward), 3. TWO 
(Arms are changed in reverse manner), and so on. 
(c) Standing Position.—Command: 1. left (right) 
ARM FORWARD AND DOWNWARD, 2. SINK (See Par. 3-9 
(b) (1)). PHYSICAL DRILL 
53 
(d) Common faults: (1) Arms not held straight 
during the swinging; (2) Head carried forward; (3) 
Shoulders not held firm. 
3-59. Stretch Standing; Arm Parting.—(a) Start- 
ing Position.—Command: 1. arms forward and up- 
ward, 2. RAISE (see par. 3-9 (a) (1)). 
(b) Exercise.—Command: 1. arms parting by the 
numbers, 2. ONE (Arms are quickly parted and low- 
ered to the yard (A) position—the yard (A) posi- 
tion is the same as the yard position described in 
par. 3-5, except that the palms are turned upward), 
3. TWO (Arms are swung upward to the stretch 
position), and so on. 
(c) Standing Position.—Command: 1. arms for- 
ward and downward, 2. SINK (see par. 3-9 (b) (1)). 
3-60. Yard (A) Standing; Arm Parting.—(a) 
Starting Position.—Command: 1. arms sideways, 2. 
RAISE (see par. 3-5 (a)), 3. hands upward, 4. TURN 
(Palms are turned upward). 
(b) Exercise.—Command; 1. arms parting by the 
numbers, 2. ONE (Arms are swung upward to the 
stretch position), 3. TWO (Arms are parted and 
lowered to the yard (A) position), and so on. 
Standing Position.—Command: 1. hands 
downward, 2. TURN (Palms are turned downward), 
3. arms downward, 4. SINK (see par. 3-5 (b)). 54 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
3-61. Wing Standing; Head Bending Backward 
(Forward).— (a). Starting Position.—Command: 1. 
hips, 2. FIRM (see par. 3-4 (a)). 
(b) Exercise.—Command: 1. head backward, 2. 
BEND (Head is bent backward as far as possible, 
chin drawn in, shoulders held firm), 3. head upward, 
4. STRETCH (Head is raised to the standing posi- 
tion), 5. HEAD FORWARD, 6. BEND, 7. HEAD UPWARD, 
8. STRETCH, 9. by the numbers, 10. ONE, 11, TWO, 
12, THREE, 13. FOUR, and so on. 
(c) Standing Position.—Command: 1. arms down- 
ward, 2. STRETCH (see par. 3-4 (b)). 
Note: Head bending can also be carried out from the 
bend, yard, or forward bend standing positions. 
3-62. Wing Standing; Head Bending Sideways.— 
(a) Starting Position.—Command: 1. hips, 2. FIRM 
(see par. 3-4 (a)). 
(b) Exercise.—Command: 1. head to the left, 2. 
BEND (Head is slowly bent to the left as far as pos- 
sible, chin drawn in, shoulders held firm), 3. head 
upward, 4. STRETCH (Head is slowly raised to the 
standing position), 5. head to the right, 6. BEND, 
7. HEAD UPWARD, 8. STRETCH, 9. BY THE NUMBERS, 10. 
ONE, 11. TWO, 12. THREE, 13. POUR, and so on. 
(c) Standing Position.—Tommand: 1. arms down- 
ward, 2. STRETCH (see par. 3-4 (b)). 
Note: Head bending sideways can also be carried out 
from the bend, yard, or forward bend standing positions. PHYSICAL DRILL 
55 
3-63. Wing Standing; Head Twisting.—(a) Start- 
ing Position.—Command; 1. hips, 2. FIRM (see par. 
3-4 (a)). 
(b) Exercise.—Command: 1. head to the left, 2. 
TWIST (Head is slowly twisted to the left as far as 
possible, keeping the head erect and the chin drawn 
in), 3. head forward, 4. TWIST (Head is slowly 
twisted forward to the standing position), 5. head 
to the right, 6. TWIST, 7. head forward, 8. TWIST, 
9. BY THE NUMBERS, 10. ONE, 11. TWO, 12. THREE, 
13. FOUR, and so on. 
(c) Standing Position.—Command: 1. arms down- 
ward, 2. STRETCH (see par. 3-4 (b)). 
Note: Head twisting can also be carried out from the 
bend, yard, and spring sitting positions. 
3-64. Rest Standing; Trunk Bending Backward 
(Forward).— (a) Starting Position.—Command: 1. 
neck, 2. REST (see par. 3-10 (a)). 
(b) Exercise.—Command: 1. trunk backward, 2. 
BEND, 3. trunk upward, 4. STRETCH (see par. 3-22), 
5. TRUNK FORWARD, 6. BEND, 7. TRUNK UPWARD, 8. 
STRETCH (see par. 3-21), 9. by the numbers, 10. 
ONE, 11. TWO, 12. THREE, 13, FOUR, and so on. 
(c) Standing Position.—Command: 1. arms down- 
ward, 2. STRETCH (see par. 3-10 (b)). 
Note: Trunk bending backward and forward can also be 
carried out from the wing, bend, yard, or stretch standing 
positions. 56 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
3-65. Yard Standing; Trunk Bending Sideways.— 
(a) Starting Position.—Command: 1. arms sideways, 
2. RAISE (see par. 3-5 (a)). 
(b) Exercise.—Command: 1. trunk to the left, 
2. BEND, 3. trunk upward, 4. STRETCH, 5. trunk 
TO THE RIGHT, 6. BEND, 7. TRUNK UPWARD, 8. STRETCH, 
(see par. 3-24), 9. by the numbers, 10. ONE, 11. TWO, 
12. THREE, 13. FOUR, and so on. 
(c) Standing Position.—Command: 1. arms down- 
ward, 2. SINK (see par. 3-5 (b)). 
Note: Trunk bending sideways can also be carried out 
from the wing, rest, bend, stretch or forward bend stand- 
ing positions. 
3-66. Rest Standing; Trunk Twisting.—(a) Start- 
ing Position.—Command: 1. neck, 2. REST (see par. 
3-10 (a)). 
(b) Exercise.—Command: 1. trunk to the left, 
2. TWIST, 3. TRUNK FORWARD, 4. TWIST, 5. TRUNK TO 
the Right, 6. TWIST, 7. trunk forward, 8. TWIST 
(see par. 3-23), 9. by the numbers, 10. ONE, 11. TWO, 
12. THREE, 13. FOUR, and so on. 
(c) Standing Position.—Command: 1. arms down- 
ward, 2. STRETCH (see par. 3-10 (b)). 
Note: Trunk twisting can also be carried out from the 
bend, yard, wing, forward bend, or stretch standing posi- 
tions. CHAPTER IV 
SCHOOL OF THE EECEUIT 
Section I—GENERAL 
4-1. Duties of Instructor.—The instructor ex- 
plains briefly each movement, first executing it 
himself. He requires the recruits to take the proper 
positions unassisted and touches them only for the 
purpose of correction when they are unable to cor- 
rect themselves. He avoids keeping the recruits too 
long at any position or movement. Each position 
or movement should be understood before passing 
to another. The instructor exacts by degrees the 
desired precision and uniformity. 
4-2. Grouping Recruits.—(a) Recruits are sep- 
arated into small groups consistent with the avail- 
able number of trained instructors in order to facil- 
itate individual instruction Each group is formed 
as a squad. 
(b) As instruction progresses, the recruits are 
grouped according to proficiency. Those who show 
a lack of aptitude and quickness are separated from 
the others and placed under the most experienced 
drill masters. Care should be taken that men who 
are naturally inapt are not ridiculed or treated 
57 58 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
harshly; an officer should carefully superintend the 
instruction of such men to insure that they are 
given firm, but quiet and considerate handling. 
Section 2—POSITIONS 
4-3. Position of Attention (fig. I). (a) Heels 
on the same line and as near each other as the 
conformation of the man permits. 
(b) Feet turned out equally and forming an angle 
of 45°. 
(c) Knees straight without stiffness. 
(d) Hips level and drawn back slightly; body 
erect and resting equally on hips, chest lifted and 
arched; shoulders square and falling equally. 
(e) Arms hanging straight down without stiffness 
so that the thumbs are along the seams of the 
trousers; back of the hands out; fingers held natu- 
rally. 
(/) Head erect and squarely to the front; chin 
drawn in so that the axis of the head and neck is 
vertical; eyes straight to the front. 
(gr) Weight of the body resting equally on the 
heels and the balls of the feet. 
(h) In assuming the position of Attention, the 
heels are brought together smartly and audibly. 
4-4. Rests.—Being at a halt, the commands are: 
PALL OUT; RST; AT EASE; or 1. parade, 2. REST. SCHOOL OF THE RECRUIT 
59 
Figure I.—Position of attention. (L. F. M., U. S. Navy.) 
486912 '’—43—s 60 
SCHOOL OF THE RECRUIT 
Figure 2.—Parade rest. 
(L. F. M„ U. S. Navy.) HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
61 
(a) At the command FALL OUT, the men leave 
the ranks but are required to remain in the imme- 
diate vicinity. The men resume their former places 
at attention at the command FALL IN. On the 
march, men will fall in AT EASE, unless they were 
at attention when the command FALL OUT was 
given. 
(b) At the command REST, one foot is kept in 
place. Silence and immobility are not required. 
(c) At the command AT EASE, the right foot is 
kept in place. Silence, but not immobility is re- 
quired. 
(d) At the command of execution, REST, of 1. 
parade, 2. REST, move the left foot smartly 12 inches 
to the left of the right foot keeping the legs straight 
so that the weight of the body rests equally on both 
feet. At the same time, clasp the hands behind 
the back, palms to the rear, thumb and fingers of 
the right hand clasping the left thumb without 
constraint; preserve silence and immobility (fig. 2). 
(e) Being at any of the rests except FALL OUT, to 
resume the position of attention, the commands are: 
1. squad, 2. ATTENTION. At the command AT- 
TENTION, take the position as prescribed in para- 
graph 4-3. 
4-5. Eyes Right or Left.—The commands are: 
1. eyes, 2. RIGHT (fig. 3), (LEFT), 3. ready, 4. 62 
SCHOOL OF THE RECRUIT 
Figure 3.-—Eyes right. 
(L. P. M., U S. Navy.) HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
63 
FRONT. At the command RIGHT, each man turns 
his head and eyes to the right. At the command 
FRONT, the head and eyes are turned to the front. 
4-6. Facings.—All facings are executed from the 
halt and in the cadence of quick time. 
(a) To the flank.—(1) The commands are: 1. 
RIGHT (LEFT), 2. FACE (ONE, TWO). At the com- 
mand PACE (or ONE), slightly raise the left heel 
and the right toe, face to the right, turning on the 
right heel, assisted by a slight pressure on the ball 
of the left foot. Hold the left leg straight without 
stiffness. At (TWO), place the left foot beside the 
right. (2) Execute left, FACE on the left heel in a 
corresponding manner. 
(b) To the rear.—The commands are: 1. about, 
2. PACE (ONE, TWO). At the command PACE (or 
ONE), carry the toe of the right foot a half-foot 
length to the rear and slightly to the left of the left 
heel without changing the position of the left foot; 
weight of the body mainly on the heel of the left 
foot; right leg straight without stiffness. At (TWO), 
face to the rear, turning to the right on the left heel 
and on the ball of the right foot; place the right heel 
beside the left. 
4-7. Salute with the hand (fig. 4). (a) The com- 
mands are: 1. hand, 2. SALUTE (ONE, TWO). At 
the command SALUTE (or ONE). raise the right 64 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Figure 4.—Hand talute. (L. F. M., U. S. Navy.) SCHOOL OF THE RECRUIT 
65 
hand smartly until the tip of the forefinger touches 
the lower part of the headdress or forehead above 
and slightly to the right of the right eye, thumb and 
fingers extended and joined, palm to the left, upper 
arm horizontal, forearm inclined at 45°, hand and 
wrist straight: at the same time turn the head and 
eyes toward the person saluted. At (TWO), drop 
the arm to its normal position by the side in one mo- 
tion, at the same time turning the head and eyes to 
the front. 
(b) Execute the first position of the hand salute 
when six paces from the person saluted, or at the 
nearest point of approach, if more than six paces. 
Hold the first position until the person saluted has 
passed or the salute is returned. Then execute the 
second movement of the hand salute. 
Section 3.—STEPS AND MARCHINGS 
4-8. General.—(a) All steps and marchings exe- 
cuted from the halt, except right step, begin with 
the left foot. 
(5) The instructor indicates the proper cadence 
when necessary by calling “One,” “Two,” “Three,” 
“Pour,” as the left and right foot respectively strike 
the ground. 
4-9 Quick Time.—Being at a halt, to march for- 
ward in quick time, the commands are; 1. forward. 66 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
2. MARCH. At the command forward, shift the 
weight of the body to the right leg without per- 
ceptible movement. At the command MARCH, step 
off smartly with the left foot and continue the 
march with 30-inch steps taken straight forward 
without stiffness or exaggeration of movements. 
Swing the arms easily in their natural arcs, 6 inches 
to the front and 3 inches to the rear of the body. 
4-10. Double Time.—(a) Being at a halt or in 
march in quick time, to march in double time the 
commands are: 1. double time, 2. MARCH. 
(1) If at a halt, at the command double time, 
shift the weight of the body to the right leg without 
perceptible movement. At the command MARCH, 
raise the forearms, fingers closed, knuckles out, to a 
horizontal position along the waistline, take up an 
easy run with the step and cadence of double time, 
allowing a natural swinging motion to the arms. 
(2) If marching in quick time, at the command 
MARCH, given as either foot strikes the ground, 
take one more step in quick time and then step off 
in double time. 
(b) To resume the quick time from double time 
the commands are; 1. quick time, 2. MARCH. At 
the command MARCH, given as either foot strikes 
the ground, advance and plant the other foot in 
double time; resume the quick time, dropping the 
hands by the sides. SCHOOL OF THE RECRUIT 
67 
4-11. To Halt.—(a) To halt when marching in 
quick time, the commands are: 1. squad, 2. HALT. 
At the command HALT, given as either foot strikes 
the ground, execute the halt in two counts by ad- 
vancing and planting the other foot and then biing- 
ing up the foot in rear. 
(b) To halt when marching in double time, the 
commands are: 1. squad, 2. HALT. At the command 
HALT, given as either foot strikes the ground, ad- 
vance and plant the other foot as in double time, 
then halt in two counts as in quick time. 
(c) To halt from side step the commands are: 1. 
squad, 2. HALT. At the command HALT, given as 
the heels are together, plant the foot next in cadence 
and come to the halt when the heels are next brought 
together. 
4-12. To Mark Time.—The commands are; 1. 
MARK TIME, 2. MARCH. 
(a) Being in march, at the command MARCH, 
given as either foot strikes the ground, advance and 
plant the other foot; bring up the foot in rear, 
placing it so that both heels are on line and continue 
the cadency by alternately raising and planting each 
foot. The feet are raised 2 inches from the ground. 
(b) Being at a halt, at the command MARCH, 
raise and plant first the left foot, and then the light 
as prescribed in paragraph 4—12 (a). 68 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
(c) Mark time may be executed in either quick 
time or double time. 
(d) The halt is executed from mark time as from 
quick time or double time by taking 2-inch vertical 
in place of 30-inch horizontal steps. 
4-13. Half Step.—(a) The commands are: 1. 
HALF STEP, 2. MARCH. At the command MARCH, 
take steps of 15 inches in quick time and 18 inches 
in double time in the same manner as prescribed in 
paragraphs 4-9 and 4-10. 
(b) FORWARD, HALF STEP, HALT, and MARK TIME may 
be executed one from the other in quick or double 
time. 
(c) To resume the full step from half step or 
mark time the commands are: 1. forward, 2. 
MARCH. 
4-14. Side Step.—(a) Being at a halt or marking 
time the commands are: 1. right (left) step, 2. 
MARCH. At the command MARCH, carry the right 
foot 12 inches to the right; place the left foot beside 
the right, left knee straight. Continue in the 
cadence of quick time. 
(b) The side step is executed in quick time from a 
halt and for short distances only. 
4-15. Back Step.—(a) Being at a halt or mark- 
ing time the commands are: 1. backward, 2. MARCH. 
At the command MARCH, take steps of 15 inches 
straight to the rear. SCHOOL OF THE RECRUIT 
69 
(b) The back step is executed in quick time from a 
halt and for short distances only. 
4-16. To Face in Marching.—The facings in 
marching are an important part of movements such 
as, COLUMN RIGHT, CLOSE, TAKE INTERVAL, EXTEND, etc. 
(a) To face to the right in marching and advance 
from a halt, at the command of execution of the 
movement, turn to the right on the ball of the right 
foot and at the same time step off in the new direc- 
tion with the left foot with a half step, full step, or 
in double time, as the case may be. 
(b) To face to the right in marching and advance, 
being in march, at the command of execution, given 
as the right foot strikes the ground, advance and 
plant the left foot, then face to the right in march- 
ing and step off in the new direction with the right 
foot with a half step, full step, or in double time, 
as the case may be. 
(c) To face to the rear in marching, being in 
march, the commands are: 1. to the rear, 2. MARCH. 
At the command MARCH, given as the right foot 
strikes the ground, advance and plant the left foot; 
turn to the right about on the balls of both feet 
and immediately step off with the left foot. 
4-17. To March by the Plank.—Being in march, 
the commands are: 1. by the right (left) flank, 2. 
MARCH. At the command MARCH, given as the 70 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
right foot strikes the ground, advance and plant 
the left foot, then face to the right in marching and 
step off in the new direction with the right foot. 
4-18. To Change Step.—The commands are: 1. 
change step, 2. MARCH, (a) Being in march in 
quick time, at the command MARCH, given as the 
right foot strikes the ground, advance and plant the 
left foot; plant the toe of the right foot near the 
heel of the left and step off with the left foot. 
(b) Execute the change on the right foot sim- 
ilarly, the command MARCH being given as the left 
foot strikes the ground. 
4-19. To March Other Than at Attention.—The 
commands are: 1. route step, 2. MARCH; or 1. at 
ease, 2. MARCH. 
(a) 1. route step, 2. MARCH. At the command 
MARCH, men are not required to march at attention, 
in cadence, or to maintain silence. 
(b) 1. at ease, 2. MARCH. At the command 
MARCH, men are not required to march at attention 
or in cadence but they will maintain silence. CHAPTER V 
SCHOOLS OF THE SQUAD, PLATOON, AND 
COMPANY 
The instructions for drill contained in this chapter 
are based on Chapter 3 of the Landing Force Manual, 
U. S. Navy, and have for their purpose disciplined 
training in orderly, group movements. To accom- 
plish the mission of the drills covered by these in- 
structions, smartness and precision in the execution 
of every detail is necessary. 
In this chapter the word “squad” refers to the unit 
having a normal strength of eight men, one of whom 
is designated as squad leader and another as second 
in command. When the squad contains that num- 
ber of men the drills can be performed most satis- 
factorily. Such a squad must not be confused with 
the litter squad (the so-called Hospital Corps squad), 
which consists of four men serving as the bearers 
of one litter. Nor should the drills described in this 
chapter be considered the same as drills with litters 
which have for their principal object instruction and 
training in the proper methods of handling litters 
and are not classed as precision drills. 
71 72 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Section I.—SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD 
5-1. General.—The squad normally has a strength 
of eight men, one of whom is designated as squad 
leader and another as second in command. The 
strength may, however, vary as authorized by ap- 
propriate Tables of Organization. When the squad 
leader is absent he is replaced by the second in 
command. If the second in command is also absent 
the next senior member of the squad acts as leader, 
but as far as practicable the squad is kept intact. 
The normal formation of the squad is a single rank 
or single file. This permits variation in the number 
of men composing the squad. The squad in line 
marches to the left or to the front only for minor 
changes of position. The squad leader, when in 
ranks, is posted as the right man of the squad if in 
line or as the leading man if in column. 
5-2. Forming the Squad.—(a) The command is: 
PALL IN. At this command, the squad forms in 
line. On falling in, each man except the one on 
the left extends his left arm laterally at shoulder 
height, palm of the hand down, fingers extended and 
joined. Each man, except the one on the right, 
turns his head and eyes to the right and places 
himself in line so that his right shoulder touches 
lightly the tips of the fingers of the man on his 
right. As soon as proper intervals have been ob- SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD 
73 
tained, each man drops his arm smartly to his side 
and turns his head to the front. 
(b) To form the squad at close intervals, the 
commands are: 1, at close interval, 2. FALL IN. 
At the command FALL IN, all fall in as prescribed 
in paragraph 5-2 (a), except that close intervals 
are obtained by placing the left hand on the hip, 
fingers extended downward and joined, thumb along 
the forefinger, heel of the hand resting against the 
hip bone near the belt, and the elbow in the plane 
of the body. 
(c) The squad falls in on the right file if the 
squad leader is not in ranks. If the squad is formed 
under litters, litters are at once inspected. The 
squad executes the positions, and movements, as 
prescribed in Sections 2 and 3 of Chapter IV, all men 
executing the movements simultaneously. 
5-3. To Dismiss the Squad.—The commands are: 
1. ATTENTION, 2. SQUAD DISMISSED. 
5-4. To Count Off.—The command is; COUNT 
OFF. At the command COUNT OFF, each man of 
the squad, except the one on the right flank, turns 
his head and eyes to the right. The right-flank 
man calls out, “One.” Each man in succession calls 
out, “Two,” “Three,” etc., turning his head and eyes 
to the front as he gives his number. This command 
may be given whenever it is desired that the men 
should know their relative positions in the squad. 74 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
5-5. To Align the Squad.—(a) If in line, the com- 
mands are: 1. dress right (left) , 2. DRESS, 3. ready, 
4. FRONT. At the command DRESS each man, 
except the one on the left, extends his left arm 
(or if at close interval, places his left hand upon 
his hip), and all align themselves to the right. The 
instructor places himself on the right flank one 
pace from and in prolongation of the line and facing 
down the line. From this position he verifies the 
alignment, ordering individual men to move forward 
or back as may be necessary. Having checked the 
alignment, he faces to the right in marching and 
moves 3 paces forward, halts, faces to the left, and 
commands: 1. ready, 2. FRONT. At the command 
FRONT, the arms are dropped quietly and smartly to 
the side and heads turned to the front. 
(b) If in column the command is: COVER. At 
the command COVER, men cover from front to rear 
with 40 inches distance between men. 
5-6. Being in Line at Normal Interval, to Obtain 
Close Interval.—The commands are; 1. close, 2. 
MARCH. At the command MARCH all men, except 
the right-flank man, face to the right in marching 
and form at close interval, as prescribed in para- 
graph 5-2 (b). 
5-7. Being in Line at Close Interval, to Extend 
to Normal Interval.—The commands are; 1. extend, SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD 
75 
2. MARCH. At the command MARCH all men, ex- 
cept the right-flank man, face to the left in march- 
ing and form at normal interval as prescribed in 
paragraph 5-2 (a). 
5-8. Being in Line, to March to the Plank.—The 
commands are: 1. right (left), 2. FACE, 3. forward, 
4. MARCH. The movements are executed as ex- 
plained in paragraphs 4-6 (a) and 4-9, all men 
stepping off simultaneously. 
5-9. To March to the Oblique.—(a) For the in- 
struction of recruits, the squad being in column or 
correctly aligned, the instructor causes each man to 
face half right (left), points out his position, and 
explains that it is to be maintained in the oblique 
march. 
(b) The squad being in any formation, the com- 
mands are: 1. right (left), oblique, 2. MARCH. At 
the command MARCH, given as the right foot strikes 
the ground, each individual advances and plants the 
left foot, faces half right in marching and steps off 
in a direction of 45° to the right of his original front. 
He preserves his relative position, keeping his shoul- 
ders parallel to those of the guide (man on right 
front of line or column), and so regulates his step 
that the ranks remain parallel to their original front. 
(c) The command HALT is given on the left foot 
when halting from the right oblique, and on the 
486912°—43 6 76 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
right foot when halting from the left oblique. At 
the command HALT, given as the left foot strikes 
the ground, each individual advances and plants 
the right foot, turns to the front on the ball of 
the right foot, and places the left foot by the side 
of the right foot. 
(d) To resume the original direction, the com- 
mands are: 1. forward, 2. MARCH. At the com- 
mand MARCH, each individual faces half left in 
marching and then moves straight to the front. 
(e) If at half step or mark time while obliquing, 
the full step is resumed by the commands; 1. 
oblique, 2. MARCH. 
(/) To give volume to the command the word 
“oblique” is pronounced to rhyme with “strike.” 
5-10. To March Towards a Flank While in 
March.—The commands are: 1. by the right (left) 
flank, 2. MARCH. At the command MARCH each 
man individually executes the movement as pre- 
scribed in paragraph 4-17. 
This movement is used when a quick movement 
to the right or left for a short distance is required. 
Normally the unit is halted, faced in the desired di- 
rection, and started forward again by the com- 
mands: 1. forward, 2. MARCH. 
5-11. Being in Column, to Change Direction.— 
The commands are: 1. column right (left) (half 77 
right) (half left), 2. MARCH. At the command 
MARCH, the leading man executes the movement as 
prescribed in paragraphs 2-16 (a) and (b). The 
other men in the column execute the same move- 
ment successively and on the same ground as the 
leading man. 
5-12. Being in Line, to Take Interval and to 
Assemble.—(a) To take interval, the commands are: 
1. TAKE INTERVAL TO THE LEFT (RIGHT), 2. MARCH. 
At the command MARCH, the right-flank man 
stands fast and extends his left arm at shoulder 
height, palm of the hand down, fingers extended and 
joined, until the man on his left obtains the proper 
interval, then he drops his arm. Other men face to 
the left in marching and step out until they have an 
interval of two arm’s lengths from the man on their 
right, then halt and face to the front. Each man, 
except the one on the left who raises his right arm 
only, extends both arms laterally at shoulder height. 
Each man, except the right-flank man, then turns 
his head and eyes to the right and places himself 
in line so that the finger tips of his right hand touch 
lightly the finger tips of the left hand of the man 
on his right. As soon as each man aligns himself 
at a two arm’s lengths interval from the man on his 
right, he drops his right arm to the side and turns 
his head and eyes to the front. He drops his left 
SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD 78 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
arm to the side when the man on his left has ob- 
tained his proper interval. 
(b) To assemble, the commands are: 1. assemble 
to the right (left) , 2. MARCH. At the command 
MARCH, the right-flank man stands fast. All other 
men face to the right in marching and form at 
normal intervals as prescribed in paragraph 5-2 (a). 
5-13. Column of Twos.—When marching small 
groups, not at drill, the group may be marched in 
column of twos by forming it in two ranks and giv- 
ing the commands: 1. right (left), 2. FACE. 
5-14. To Form Column of Twos From Single File 
and Re-form.—(a) The squad being in column, at 
a halt, to form column of twos, the commands are; 
1. form column of twos, 2. MARCH. At the com- 
mand MARCH the leading man stands fast; the 
second man in the squad moves by the oblique until 
he is to the left and abreast of the squad leader with 
normal interval, and halts; the third man moves 
forward until behind the squad leader with normal 
distance and halts; the fourth man moves by the 
oblique until he is to the left and abreast of the third 
man with normal interval, and halts; and so on. 
(b) The squad being in column of twos, in march- 
ing, to re-form single file, the squad is first halted. 
The commands are; 1. form single file from the 
right, 2. MARCH. At the command MARCH, the SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD 
79 
leading man of the right column moves forward, 
the leading man of the left column steps off to the 
right oblique, then executes left oblique so as to 
follow the right file at normal distance. Remaining 
twos follow successively in like manner. 
Section 2.—SCHOOL OP THE PLATOON 
5-15. Formations of More Than One Squad. 
(a) The squads form in line, one behind the other, 
with 40 inches distance between ranks. 
(b) Squads are usually arranged to produce a 
three- or four-rank formation so that by facing to 
the right the unit will march in column of threes 
or column of fours depending on the number of 
squads. 
(c) A two-squad unit forms in two ranks and 
marches in column of twos. 
(d) A three-squad unit forms in three ranks and 
marches in column of threes. 
(e) A four-squad unit forms in four ranks and 
marches in column of fours. 
(/) A platoon composed of two sections of two 
squads each, forms in four ranks and marches in 
column of fours. 
(g) Movements are described herein for column 
of threes or fours and may be executed by either 
formation. 80 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
(h) When in line, the platoon is aligned as pre- 
scribed for the squad in paragraph 5-5. The align- 
ment of each rank is verified by the platoon leader. 
(i) The platoon, being in line, takes interval and 
assembles as prescribed for the squad in paragraph 
5-12. This movement may be ordered after ranks 
are opened for the display of field equipment or for 
other special purpose. It is not utilized in forming 
for physical training. 
5-16. Composition and Formation of the Pla- 
toon.—The platoon consists of platoon headquarters 
and several squads. Platoon headquarters consists 
of a platoon leader and one or more assistants. For 
purposes of drill and ceremonies, a 3-squad or 4- 
squad formation should be arranged and the size 
of the squads equalized. 
5-17. Position of Individuals.—(a) The platoon 
leader takes position 6 paces in front of the center 
of his platoon when in line. In march formation 
(column of threes or fours), he marches at the head 
of his platoon. 
(b) The second in command of a platoon takes 
position on the left of the left man of the rear rank 
when squads, are in line unless otherwise indicated. 
When squads are in column, he follows the rear 
man in the right squad. The second in command 
observes the conduct of the unit, sees that the proper SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD 
81 
formation is maintained, and that commands are 
promptly and properly executed. The platoon guide 
is posted on the right of the right-flank man of the 
front rank when in line. In column he takes post in 
front of the right-flank man. He is responsible for 
maintaining the proper direction and cadence of 
march of the platoon. 
5-18. To Form the Platoon.—(a) The command 
is: FALL IN. At the command FALL IN the first 
squad forms in line, as prescribed in paragraph 5-2 
(a), its center opposite and three paces from the 
platoon petty officer. The other squads form in rear 
of the first squad and in the same manner, with 40 
inches distance between ranks. Members of the rear 
squads extend their arms to obtain their approximate 
intervals, covering the corresponding members in 
the first squad. The guide places himself as pre- 
scribed in paragraph 5-17 (b). 
(b) To form with close interval, the commands 
are: 1. at close interval, 2. FALL IN. At the com- 
mand FALL IN the movement is executed as pre- 
scribed in paragraph 5-18 (a) except that squads 
form at close interval. 
(c) The platoon ordinarily is formed and dis- 
missed by the platoon petty officer. 
5-19. To Dismiss the Platoon.—(a) The com- 
mands are: 1. attention, 2. PLATOON DISMISSED. 82 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
5-20. To March the Platoon.—(a) The normal 
formation for marching is in column of threes (or 
fours) with squad columns abreast, squad leaders 
at the heads of their squads. The platoon in line 
marches to the left or to the front only for minor 
changes of position. 
(b) To march to the right, the platoon being in 
line, the commands are: 1. right, 2. FACE, 3. for- 
ward, 4. MARCH. This marches the platoon in 
column of threes (or fours) to the right. 
5-21. Guide in Marching.—Except when otherwise 
directed, men in ranks keep the proper distance and 
interval and align themselves on the men towards 
the flank on which the guide is marching. When 
it is desired to guide towards the left, the command 
is: GUIDE LEFT. The guide and the platoon leader 
then change their relative positions. 
5-22. Being in Column of Threes (or Fours) at 
Normal Interval Between Squads, to March (or 
Form) at Close Interval.—(a) The commands are; 
1. close, 2. MARCH. At the command MARCH, the 
squads close to the center by obliquing until the 
interval between men is 4 inches. The center squad 
(or squads) take up the half step until the dress 
has been regained. The distance, 40 inches, re- 
mains unchanged. SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD 
83 
(b) If this movement is executed from the halt, 
the squads close towards the center by executing 
right or left step until 4-inch intervals are reached. 
If in column of threes, the first and third squads left 
and right step two steps. If in column of fours, the 
second and third squads left and right step one step, 
the first and fourth squads left and right step three 
steps. 
5-23. Being in Column of Threes (or Fours) at 
Close Interval Between Squads, to March (or 
Form) at Normal Interval.—(a) The commands are; 
1. extend, 2. MARCH. At the command MARCH the 
squads open to the right and left from the center by 
obliquing until the interval between men is one 
arm’s length. The center squad (or squads) take up 
the half step until the dress has been regained. 
(b) If this movement is executed from the halt, 
the squads execute right or left step until they have 
secured the proper interval by reversing the proce- 
dure explained in paragraph 5-22. 
5-24. Being in Column of Threes (or Fours) , to 
Change Direction.—The commands are: 1. column 
right (left), 2. MARCH. At the command MARCH, 
given as the right foot strikes the ground, the right- 
flank man of the leading rank faces to the right in 
marching as prescribed in paragraph 4-16 (a) and 84 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
(b), and takes up the half step until the other men 
of his rank are abreast of him, then he resumes the 
full step. The other men of the leading rank oblique 
to the right in marching without changing interval, 
place themselves abreast of the pivot man, and con- 
form to his step. The ranks in rear of the leading 
rank execute the movement on the same ground, and 
in the same manner, as the leading rank. 
5-25. Being in Column of Threes (or Fours), to 
Form Line to the Front.—The commands are: 
1. column right, 2. MARCH, 3. platoon, 4. HALT, 
5. left, 6. FACE. Column right is executed as pre- 
scribed in paragraph 5-24. The command HALT is 
given after the change of direction is completed. 
5-26. Being in Any Formation in March, to March 
Towards a Flank.—The commands are: 1. by the 
right (left) flank, 2. MARCH. This movement is 
executed as prescribed for the squad in paragraph 
5-10. If the platoon is in column at close (4-inch) 
intervals, the squads in rear of the squad that be- 
comes the leading squad take up the half-step until 
they each reach 40 inches distance from the squad 
ahead. This movement is used only for short 
distances. 
5-27. Being in Line, to Open and to Close Ranks.— 
(a) To open ranks the commands are; 1. open ranks, 
2. MARCH, 3. ready, 4. FRONT. At the command SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD 
85 
MARCH the front rank takes three steps forward, 
halts, and executes Dress Right. The second rank 
takes two steps forward, halts, and executes Dress 
Right. The third rank takes one step forward, halts, 
and executes Dress Right. The fourth rank, if any, 
executes Dress Right. The platoon leader places 
himself on the flank towards which the dress is to be 
made, one pace from and in prolongation of the 
front rank and facing down the line. From this 
position he aligns the front rank. The second and 
third ranks are aligned in the same manner. In 
moving from one rank to another, the platoon leader 
faces to the left in marching. After verifying the 
alignment of the rear rank, he faces to the right 
in marching, moves three paces beyond the front 
rank, halts, faces to the left and commands; 1. ready, 
2. FRONT. 
(b) To close ranks the commands are: 1. close 
ranks, 2. MARCH. At the command MARCH the 
front rank stands fast; the second rank takes one 
step forward and halts; the third rank takes 2 steps, 
forward and halts; and the fourth rank, if any, 
takes 3 steps forward and halts. Each man covers 
his file leader. 
5-28. To Form for Shelter Tents.—The platoon 
being in line, the commands are: 1. form for shelter 
TENTS TO THE LEFT (RIGHT) , 2. MARCH. 3. DRESS RIGHT 86 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
(LEFT), 4. DRESS, 5. READY, 6. FRONT, 7. COUNT 
OFF. 
(a) At the first command the second in command 
moves to a position on the right of the guide, who is 
on the right of the right man of the front rank. 
The messenger takes position on the left of the left 
man of the rear rank. 
ib) At the command MARCH all squads, except 
the front squad, face to the left in marching and 
step off. Squad leaders by giving appropriate com- 
mands: 1. BY THE RIGHT (LEFT) FLANK, 2. MARCH, 
and 1. squad, 2. HALT, move their squads into line 
abreast of the squad(s) already in line. 
(c) At the commands: 3. dress right (left), 4. 
DRESS, 5. ready, 6. FRONT, and 7. COUNT OFF, 
given by the platoon leader, the entire rank executes 
these movements as prescribed in paragraphs 5-4, 
5-5. 
(d) On direction of the platoon leader, the odd 
numbers mark their position with their left heel, 
to indicate the position of the front tent pole. Odd 
and even numbers (Nos. 1 and 2; Nos. 3 and 4; etc.) 
pitch tents together. 
(e) To assemble, the platoon is faced to the right 
and re-formed from single file into column of threes 
(or fours) to the right (left) as prescribed in para- 
graph 5-29 (/). The platoon petty officer and mes- 
senger resume their normal posts. SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD 
87 
5-29. To Form Column of Twos and Single File 
and Re-form.—The platoon may be marched in col- 
umn of twos or single file by the procedures given 
next. This is not a precise movement. It is prac- 
ticed in drill so that when necessary the movement 
may be executed smoothly and without delay. The 
change of column is always made from a halt. 
(a) The platoon being in column of threes, at a 
halt, to form column of twos, the commands are: 1. 
COLUMN OF TWOS FROM THE RIGHT (LEFT) , 2. MARCH. 
At the command MARCH the right two squads march 
forward; the left squad forms column of twos as 
prescribed for the squad and then executes column 
HALF RIGHT and COLUMN HALF LEFT SO as to follow 
in column the leading squads. Forty-inch distances 
are maintained. 
(b) The platoon being in column of twos, at a halt, 
to re-form in column of threes, the commands are: 1. 
COLUMN OF THREES TO THE LEFT (RIGHT), 2. MARCH. 
At the command MARCH the leading two squads 
stand fast. The rear squad forms single file from 
the right as prescribed in paragraph 5-14 (b), and 
moves to its normal place beside the leading squads 
by executing column half left then column half 
right. It is halted when its leading file is on line 
with the leading rank of the platoon. 88 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
(c) The platoon being in column of fours, at a 
halt, to form column of twos, the commands are; 
1. COLUMN OF TWOS FROM THE RIGHT (LEFT) , 2. MARCH. 
At the command MARCH the right two squads march 
forward; the left two squads initially stand fast, then 
follow the leading two squads by executing column 
half right and column half left. Forty-inch dis- 
tances are maintained. 
(d) The platoon being in column of twos, at a halt, 
to re-form in column of fours, the commands are: 
1. COLUMN OF FOURS TO THE LEFT (RIGHT), 2. MARCH. 
At the command MARCH the leading two squads 
stand fast. The two rear squads move to their nor- 
mal places by executing column half left then col- 
umn half right and are halted when the leading 
files are on line with the leading rank of the platoon. 
(e) To form single file, the platoon being in 
column of threes (or fours), at a halt, the commands 
are: 1. column of files from the right (left), 2. 
MARCH. At the command MARCH the right squad 
of the platoon moves forward. The other squads 
stand fast initially and then successively follow the 
leading squad by executing COLUMN HALF RIGHT 
and COLUMN HALF LEFT. Distances of 40 inches 
are maintained. 
(/) To re-form in column of threes (or fours), 
the platoon being in single file, at a halt, the com- SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD 
89 
mands are: 1. column of threes (or fours) to the 
left (RIGHT), 2. MARCH. At the command MARCH 
the leading squad stands fast. The other squads 
move to their normal places by executing column 
half left, then, at the proper time, column half 
right, and are halted when the leading file is on line 
with the leading rank of the platoon. 
Whenever commands are given involving move- 
ments of squads in which one squad stands fast, 
takes up the march, continues the march, or changes 
formation, the squad leader gives the appropriate 
commands. 
5-30. General.—The company consists of a com- 
pany headquarters and two or more platoons. For 
close-order drill and ceremonies, company head- 
quarters personnel present are attached to platoons 
to equalize the strength thereof. Members of the 
company headquarters are formed for marches or 
special purposes or as directed by the company com- 
mander or higher authority. 
5-31. Positions of the Chief Petty Officer for 
Drills and Ceremonies.—(a) With the company in 
ne- At normal distance in rear of the squad leader 
of the rear squad of the left center or center platoon. 
Section 3.—SCHOOL OP THE COMPANY 90 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
(b) With the company in column of platoons (the 
platoons being in columns of threes).—At normal 
distance in rear of the left squad of the rear platoon 
for drills and ceremonies. For march formation, his 
position is at normal distance behind the company 
commander. 
(c) With the company in mass formation.—At 
normal distance in rear of the second in command 
of the left (or left center) platoon. 
, (d) The chief petty officer takes post in march 
formation at normal distance behind the company 
commander. 
5-32. Positions of the Guidon Bearer for Drills 
and Ceremonies.—(a) With the company in line or 
in mass formation.—One pace to the rear and 3 paces 
to the left of the company commander. 
(b) With the company in column of threes or 
fours.—At normal interval to the right of the com- 
pany commander. 
(c) For marches in the field, the guidon is dis- 
posed with the company headquarters baggage or as 
otherwise directed. If carried by the guidon bearer, 
he takes the position at normal interval to the right 
of the company commander. 
5-33. Rules for Company Drill.—(a) The pla- 
toon, rather than the company, is the basic close- 
order drill unit. For the company, only such for- SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY 
91 
mations are prescribed as are necessary for marches, 
drills, and ceremonies. 
(b) Platoon leaders repeat such preparatory com- 
mands as are to be immediately executed by their 
platoons, such as forward, and the men execute the 
movement if it applies to their platoons at the com- 
mand of execution, such as MARCH and HALT, given 
by the company commander. In movements exe- 
cuted in route step and at ease, the platoon leaders 
repeat the command of execution if necessary. Pla- 
toon leaders do not repeat the company commander’s 
commands to FALL OUT, etc., nor those commands 
which are not essential to the execution of a move- 
ment by their platoons. In giving commands or 
cautions, platoon leaders may prefix the numbers 
of the platoons, as: first platoon, HALT; or second 
PLATOON, FORWARD, MARCH. 
(c) Whenever commands are given involving 
movements of the company in which one platoon 
stands fast or continues the march, its platoon leader 
commands: STAND PAST, or cautions, continue the 
march, as the case may be. 
5-34. To Form the Company.—(a) The chief petty 
officer takes post 9 paces in front of the point where 
the center of the company is to be, faces that point, 
and commands: FALL IN. At the command PALL 
IN the company forms in three (or four) ranks with 
486912°—43 7 92 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
normal interval between men (unless close interval 
is directed) and 3-pace intervals between platoons. 
(b) Each platoon petty officer takes post 3 paces 
in front of the point where the center of his platoon 
will be. The platoons form in their proper places 
under supervision of the platoon petty officers. 
(c) The platoon petty officers then command: 
REPORT. Remaining in position, the squad leaders, 
in succession from front to rear in each platoon, 
salute and report: “All present,” or “ absent.” 
At the command REPORT given by the chief petty 
officer, the platoon petty officers successively, be- 
ginning with the right platoon, salute and report: 
“All present or accounted for,” or “ men 
absent.” 
(d) All platoons having reported, the chief petty 
officer commands: POSTS. The platoon petty 
officers face about and move by the most direct 
routes to their positions. The chief petty officer 
then faces the company commander, salutes, and 
reports: “Sir, all present or accounted for,” or “Sir, 
men absent,” and without command faces 
about and moves by the most direct route to his 
former position. 
(e) If the platoons cannot be formed in regularly 
organized squads, the platoon petty officers call the 
rolls. Each man, as his name is called, answers SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY 
93 
“Here.” The platoon petty officers then divide the 
platoons into squads and report as described in 
paragraph 5-34 (c). 
(/) The company commander places himself 12 
paces in front of the center of and facing the com- 
pany in time to receive the report of the chief petty 
officer. The second in command and those com- 
manding platoons take their posts immediately after 
the chief petty officer has reported and draw their 
swords or sabers with the company commander. 
(gO In forming the company, all who are re- 
quired to salute and make a report maintain the 
position of salute until it is returned. 
5-35. To Form With Close Interval Between 
Men.—The commands are: 1. at close interval, 2. 
FALL IN. At the command FALL IN the company 
forms as prescribed in paragraph 5-34, with each 
platoon forming as prescribed in paragraph 5-18 (b). 
This formation is used only for roll calls, or where 
space is limited. 
5-36. To Align the Company.—The company be- 
ing in line at a halt, the command is: DRESS RIGHT 
(CENTER or LEFT). At the command DRESS 
RIGHT, the platoon leader of the base platoon 
dresses his platoon immediately. When DRESS 
CENTER is given, the leader of the center platoon 
dresses his platoon to the right. Each platoon 94 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
leader dresses his platoon towards the center (right 
or left) of the company as soon as the base platoon 
or the platoon next towards the base platoon has 
completed its dress. In mass formation, the com- 
mands are given by the company commander, and 
the alignment of each rank is verified expeditiously 
by the platoon leader of the base platoon. 
5-37. To Dismiss the Company.—(a) The com- 
pany being in line at a halt, the company commander 
directs the chief petty officer: “Dismiss the com- 
pany.” The officers fall out; the chief petty officer 
moves to a point 9 paces in front of the center 
of the company, salutes the company comander, 
faces toward the company, and commands; 1. at- 
tention, 2. DISMISSED. 
(b) Dismissal may also take place by the com- 
mand: DISMISS YOUR PLATOONS. The platoons, 
being in line at a halt, are then dismissed on direc- 
tion of the individual platoon leaders to the platoon 
petty officers. Each platoon petty officer takes post 
3 paces in front of the center of his platoon, salutes 
the platoon leader, faces toward the platoon, and 
dismisses it as prescribed for the chief petty officer 
in dismissing the company. 
5-38. Previous Instruction Applicable.—The com- 
pany marches, executes changes of direction, closes 
and extends intervals between squads in column of SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY 
95 
threes or fours, opens and closes ranks, as in platoon 
drill. 
5-39. Being in Line, to March to the Right.—(a) 
The company is faced to the right and marched as 
prescribed for the platoon in paragraph 5-20. The 
company commander, chief petty officer, and guidon 
take positions as previously described. For drills 
and ceremonies, the chief petty officer takes position 
as prescribed in paragraph 5-31 id). 
The company marches to the left from line only 
for minor changes of position. 
Mass formations and movements. 
-5-40. Being in Column of Threes of Fours at 
Close Interval, to Form Company Mass.—(a) The 
company being at a halt, the commands are: 1. 
COMPANY MASS LEFT (RIGHT), 2. MARCH. At the 
command MARCH the leading platoon stands fast. 
The rear platoons move to position alongside the 
leading platoon (s) at 4-inch intervals by executing 
COLUMN HALF LEFT then COLUMN HALF RIGHT. Each 
platoon is halted when its leading rank is on line 
with the leading rank of the platoon (s) already on 
line. This forms the company in mass, with 4-inch 
intervals between all men in ranks. 
(b) The company being in march, the commands 
are the same and the movement is executed as given 96 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
in paragraph 5-40 (a), except that immediately 
after the command MARCH, the leading platoon 
is halted by the commands: 1. platoon, 2. HALT, 
given by its own leader. 
5-41. Being in Columns of Threes or Fours, To 
Form Extended Mass Formation.—The commands 
are: 1. company mass (2, 3,4, etc.) paces left (right) , 
2. MARCH. At the command MARCH the movement 
is executed as described in paragraph 5-40 except 
that the rear platoons move to position alongside 
the leading platoon(s) at the intervals ordered by 
executing column left and column right. Each 
platoon is halted when its leading rank is on line 
with the leading rank of the platoon(s) already on 
line. This formation is used for drills and cere- 
monies if it is desired to increase the size of the mass 
in order to present a more impressive appearance. 
The company in this formation drills in the same 
manner as for mass formation, maintaining the in- 
terval between platoons. Extended mass formation 
is also utilized in forming the company for inspec- 
tion. 
5-42. Being in Mass Formation, To Change Direc- 
tion.—(a) The commands are: 1. column right 
(LEFT), 2. MARCH, 3. FORWARD, 4. MARCH. The 
right-flank man of the line of guides and platoon 
leaders is the pivot of this movement. At the com- SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY 
97 
mand MARCH he faces to the right in marching and 
takes up the half step. Other first-rank men exe- 
cute right oblique, advance until opposite their place 
in line, execute a second right oblique and, upon 
arriving abreast of the pivot man, take up the half 
step. Each succeeding rank executes the move- 
ment on the same ground and in the same manner 
as the first rank. All take the full step at the 
command MARCH, which is given after the entire 
company has changed direction. This movement 
is an example of the turn on a moving pivot. 
(b) In turning to the left on a moving pivot, each 
rank dresses to the left until the command 
MARCH, after which the dress is to the right unless 
otherwise announced. 
(c) The company commander faces to the rear 
and marches backward, observing the movement, 
until the change in direction has been completed. 
5-43. Being in Company Mass, To Form Column of 
Threes (or Fours).—Being at a halt, the commands 
are: 1. column of threes (or fours), 2. right pla- 
toon, forward, 3. MARCH. At the command 
MARCH the right platoon marches forward. The 
other platoons follow in column in their normal 
formation successively by executing column half 
right and column half left at the commands of 
their respective leaders. 98 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Company inspection. 
5-44. (a) Formation.—The company forms in line 
or in an inspection formation of column of platoons 
as described in paragraphs 5-45 and 8-5 (e). 
(b) Procedure.— (1) The company being in col- 
umn of platoons (pars. 5-45 and 8-5 (e)) the com- 
pany commander commands: PREPARE FOR IN- 
SPECTION. At this command platoon leaders 
cause ranks to be opened. They then place them- 
selves, facing to the front, 3 paces in advance of the 
right flank of their platoons. 
(2) Ranks having been opened, the company com- 
mander commands: REST. He returns sword and 
then inspects the company. During the inspection, 
officers, petty officers, and guidon bearers not in 
ranks come to Attention as the inspecting officer ap- 
proaches and after being inspected resume the posi- 
tion of Rest. The company commander may direct 
the chief petty officer to join him and take down 
notes as he inspects. The company commander, 
commencing at the head of the column, then makes 
a minute inspection of the equipment, dress, and 
appearance of the personnel of the company, and 
as he approaches each platoon its leader brings the 
platoon to Attention and salutes. As soon as in- 
spected, the platoon leader returns sword, places 
himself on the right of the company commander, SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY 
99 
and accompanies him throughout the inspection of 
the platoon. 
(3) The inspection is made from right to left in 
front and left to right in rear of each rank, 
(4) Upon completion of the inspection of each 
platoon, its leader takes his post, faces down the 
line, and commands: 1. close ranks, 2. MARCH, and 
adds REST after ranks have been closed. He then 
takes his post in front of the center of the platoon. 
(5) The company commander may direct the pla- 
toon leaders to make the detailed inspection of the 
equipment, etc. of the men of their platoons. 
5-45. Inspection of Personal Field Equipment 
While in Ranks.—This is described in paragraph 
8-5 (e). 
5-46. Inspecting Officer Other Than the Com- 
pany Commander.—Should the inspecting officer be 
other than the company commander, the latter, 
after commanding REST, will face the front. When 
the inspecting officer approaches, the company com- 
mander will face about, bring the company to At- 
tention, face to the front and salute. As soon as 
the company commander has been inspected he 
faces about, commands REST, returns sword and 
accompanies the inspecting officer. During the in- 
spection of a platoon its leader marches on the 100 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
right of the inspecting officer. The inspection pro- 
ceeds as previously prescribed. 
5-47. Inspection of Quarters or Camp.—(a) In 
quarters, headdress and accoutrements are removed 
and the men stand near their respective bunks; in 
camp they stand covered in front of their tents but 
without accoutrements. 
(b) If the personal field equipment has not been 
inspected and its inspection in camp or in quarters 
is ordered, each man arranges the required articles 
as prescribed in paragraph 8-5 (/)). 
(c) The company commander, accompanied by 
the other company officers, then inspects the quar- 
ters or camp. The chief petty officer precedes the 
company commander and calls the men to Attention 
on entering each squad room or on approaching 
each area; the men stand at Attention but do not 
salute. CHAPTER VI 
MANUAL OF THE ARMY LITTER 
Section I.—GENERAL 
6-1. Definition.-A litter is a bed or stretcher so 
arranged with poles at the sides that the sick and 
injured may be moved or carried on it by two or more 
bearers. 
6-2. Requisites of a Litter for Military Use. For 
satisfactory employment in a military service a litter 
must be sufficient in size to accommodate, without 
undue discomfort, individuals whose heights and 
weights are within the prescribed maximum limits 
of the service. It should be as light as possible 
without sacrificing necessary strength and durability, 
its durability must be commensurate with the rough 
usage to which it may be subjected in military opera- 
tions, and it should be collapsible in at least one 
axis to facilitate handling, storage, and movement 
to the point of employment. All litters should possess 
the same dimensions when open. 
6-3. Description of Army Litter.—The litter com- 
monly known as the Army litter, as used in the 
Navy, is of either the metal-pole or wooden-pole 
type. 
101 102 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
The metal-vole litter has an over-all length of 
about 90 inches, an over-all width of about 22 inches, 
an over-all height of about 6 inches, and a maximum 
weight of not more than 22 pounds. It consists 
of a canvas bed approximately 6 feet long supported 
by two rigid, tubular, cold-rolled steel poles which 
are inserted into heavily stitched side loops on the 
sides of the canvas. The poles have an outside 
diameter of about 1.250 inches and are equipped 
with hand-formed grips at each end. Each pole is 
supported (when the litter is grounded) by two 
stirrup-shaped, cold-rolled steel feet about 50 inches 
apart and extending approximately 4Mj inches below 
the surface of the pole to which they are firmly 
attached by oval head bolts which also serve to secure 
the canvas bed to the pole. Two jointed, positive- 
locking, cold-rolled steel spreader bars, extending 
between and securely attached to opposite feet, hold 
the canvas bed taut when they are fully extended. 
The folding, metal-pole litters carried in the Sup- 
ply Catalog of the Medical Department, U. S. Navy, 
as an item of field equipment, are similar to the 
rigid metal-pole litter with the exceptions that the 
poles, feet, and spreader bars are made of aluminum 
alloy instead of steel, thereby reducing the weight, 
and they fold at the center in addition to collapsing 
on the long axis. MANUAL OF THE ARMY LITTER 
103 
The wooden-vole litter consists of a canvas bed, 
6 feet long and 22 inches wide, made fast to two 
wooden poles TY2 feet long and stretched taut by 
two jointed spreader bars. The ends of the poles 
form handles, by which the litter is carried. Four 
iron, stirrup-shaped feet, 4 inches high and 1% 
inches wide, are firmly fixed to the poles. On the 
left front and right rear handles a half-round iron 
ring is fixed 4*/2 inches from the end; between this 
and the canvas plays the movable ring of the sling. 
One pair of slings is permanently attached to each 
litter. They are made of khaki-colored webbing, 
2V2 inches wide, with a leather-lined loop or bight 
at each end and a metal slide to regulate the length. 
One loop of the sling passes through a metal swivel, 
itself attached to the movable x’ing of the handle. 
The weight of the wooden-pole litter is approximately 
22 pounds. 
6-4. Improvisation of Litters.—(a) In the ab- 
sence of actual litters more or less satisfactory 
substitutes must be improvised. Among the many 
things that can be used for this purpose are rifles 
or poles and overcoats, rifles or poles and blankets, 
hammocks, and litter-shaped objects such as camp 
cots, window shutters, doors, benches, ladders, etc., 
which should be properly padded. 
(t>) Suggested Improvisations.—(l) Rifles and 
blanket. Fold a blanket once from side to side and 104 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
lay a rifle transversely upon it across the center so 
that the butt and muzzle project beyond the edges. 
Next fold one end of the blanket upon the other, lay 
a second rifle upon the new center, and fold the free 
ends of the blanket upon the end containing the 
first rifle so as to project a couple of inches beyond. 
To carry this improvised litter the front bearer 
grasps the barrels of the rifles and the rear bearer 
holds by the butts, trigger guards up. 
(2) Rifles and overcoat. Turn an overcoat inside 
out and button it, keeping the sleeves inside. With 
the buttons down and beginning at the collar end, 
insert the barrel of a rifle through each sleeve. To 
carry this improvised litter the front beai’er rolls 
the tails of the overcoat tightly around the rifle 
barrels and takes his grasp over them; the rear 
bearer holds by the butts, trigger guards up. Two 
or three blouses or jumpers may be utilized in the 
same manner as, and in lieu of, the overcoat. 
(3) Poles and blanket. Spread a blanket length- 
wise on the ground, lay a pole 7 feet long across the 
center of the blanket, and fold the blanket over the 
pole. Lay a second pole 7 feet long across the cen- 
ter of the new fold and fold the blanket over the 
second pole as over the first. Should it be desirable 
one half of the blanket may be rolled lengthwise 
into a cylinder which is placed along the back of MANUAL OF THE ARMY LITTER 
105 
the patient who has been turned carefully on his 
side. The patient then is turned over upon the 
blanket and the cylinder unrolled on the other side. 
A pole 7 feet long is then laid down on each outer 
edge of the blanket and rolled tightly in it, each 
a like number of times, until the side of the patient 
is reached. A shelter-tent half may be utilized in 
the same manner as, and in lieu of, the blanket. 
(4) Poles and overcoats, blouses, or junipers. 
Turn two overcoats or two or three blouses, or jump- 
ers inside out, keeping the sleeves inside and button- 
ing the overcoats or blouses. Pass poles through the 
sleeves in such manner as to place the buttons be- 
neath the litter bed which is formed of the backs 
of the garments. 
(5) Miscellaneous improvisations. Rip the bot- 
toms of sacks or bags of any description, if large 
and strong enough, pass two poles through two, or 
even three, sacks placed end to end and tie two 
cross pieces to the poles to keep them apart. Bed- 
ticks, if not too wide, may be used in the same way 
by cutting off the four corners and passing poles 
through the holes so made. 
Lash two short poles about 2 feet long across two 
long poles with bandages or other materials and 
secure a blanket, shelter-tent half, or poncho over 
the pole frame. Rope, wire, or similar material may 106 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
be woven between the poles of the frame and the 
network covered with a blanket, pieces of straw 
matting, rugs, or carpets folded or cut into shape. 
Straw mats, leafy twigs, weeds, hay, straw, etc., 
covered or not with a blanket, make a good bottom 
over a framework of poles and cross sticks. Ropes 
or rawhide strips the turns of which cross each other 
at close intervals make an excellent litter bottom. 
Section 2.—INSTRUCTION IN THE USE OF 
THE ARMY LITTER 
6-5. Purpose.—The purpose of this section is to 
provide a guide for instructing personnel in methods 
of handling litters. The general use of these in- 
structions will secure uniformity in the proper meth- 
ods of performing a highly important function of 
medical service, and, at the same time, save valuable 
training time. 
Scope.—This section includes proper methods of 
handling, opening, closing, and strapping litters. 
Commands.—Although not to he considered a pre- 
cision drill, certain commands should he utilized to 
facilitate instruction. The use of these commands 
in actual operations is not contemplated. 
6-6. Litter Squad.— (a) composition.—A litter 
squad, both for purposes of instruction and for actual 
field employment, ordinarily consists of four bear- 
ers. Fewer are unable to withstand the fatigue of MANUAL OF THE ARMY LITTER 
107 
long and frequent carries, except when aided by a 
wheeled litter carrier or similar device. 
(b) designation of bearers.—During instruction, 
each bearer is given a numerical designation. Mem- 
bers of a litter squad, being in line, are numbered 
consecutively from right to left. No. lis the squad 
leader; in his absence, No. 4 commands; if both Nos. 
1 and 4 are absent, No. 3 becomes the squad leader. 
(c) duties in reduced squads.—JSfos. 3 and 2 being 
absent, their duties are assumed by Nos. 1 and 4, 
respectively. No. 1 being absent, No. 4 assumes his 
duties. In his absence, the duties of No. 4 do not 
require replacement. 
(d) instruction in reduced squads.—Under ex- 
ceptional circumstances, when 2-bearer squads are 
being instructed, the instruction is as for Nos. 2 and 
3 of the 4-bearer squad. 
6-7. Litter, Strapped and Closed.—(a) The metal- 
pole litter is said to be strapped (fig. 5) when it is 
folded, the canvas doubled smoothly, and secured by 
the cross straps. The wooden-pole litter is said to 
be strapped when it is folded, the canvas doubled 
smoothly on top, the slings placed thereon parallel 
to each other, and all secured by the cross straps. 
(b) The metal-pole litter is said to be closed when 
it is folded but unstrapped. The wooden-pole litter 
is said to be closed (fig. 6) when it is folded but 
486912°—43 8 108 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Figure s.—Wooden-pole litter, strapped. (U. S. Army. MANUAL OF THE ARMY LITTER 
109 
Figure 6.—Wooden-pole litter, closed. (U. S. Army.) 110 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
unstrapped, the loop of the front sling upon the left 
handle and the loop of the rear sling upon the right 
handle, the bight of each sling embracing the oppo- 
site handle. 
6-8. Instruction with Unloaded Litters.—(a) 
formation for instruction.—Being in its normal 
formation, to form and align the unit (squad, pla- 
toon, or company) in a single rank for instruction in 
litter drill, appropriate infantry drill commands are 
employed. Following completion of the instruction, 
to return the unit to its normal formation, appro- 
priate infantry drill commands are similarly em- 
ployed. 
(b) formation of litter squads.—The unit being 
in single rank facing the front, to form litter squads, 
the commands are: 1. count, 2. FOURS. At the com- 
mand FOURS, all except the right file execute eyes 
right, and, beginning with the right file, count one, 
two, three, four, one, etc., each man turning his 
head and eyes to the front as he counts. 
(c) designation of squads.—Litter squads being 
formed, to designate squads by number, the com- 
mands are: 1. count, 2. LITTER SQUADS. At the 
command LITTER SQUADS, No. 1 of each squad 
except the one on the right, executes eyes right, and, 
beginning on the right, counts, in consecutive order, 
one, two, three, etc., until ail have counted. Each MANUAL OF THE ARMY LITTER 
111 
Figure 7.—Formation for instruction in handling the litter. 112 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Figure B.—Procure, LITTER, first step. MANUAL OF THE ARMY LITTER 
113 
No. 1 turns his head and eyes to the front as he 
counts. 
(d) procurement of litters.—Being in proper jor- 
motion (fig. 7) and litters being available in the 
immediate vicinity, for each litter squad to procure 
one litter, the commands are: 1. procure, 2. LITTER. 
At the command LITTER, all Nos. 3 step one pace to 
the rear (fig. 8), execute right (left) face, as re- 
quired by the location of the litters, and immediately 
proceed in column of files by the nearest route to 
the closed or strapped litters. Each takes one litter, 
places it on the right shoulder, and all promptly 
return in reverse order to the rear of the line (fig. 
9), turn, and step into the line in unison (fig. 10), 
litters at the vertical. Upon arriving in position, 
Nos. 3 bring litters to the shoulder (fig. 11). This 
march should be supervised by a petty officer. It 
can be executed in double time. 
(e) return of litters.—Instruction having been 
completed, to return litters to place of procurement, 
the commands are: 1. return, 2. LITTER. This 
movement is executed in the same manner as Pro- 
cure Litter, except that the litters are carried from, 
instead of towards, the unit. 
(/) litter at the shoulder.—In the position “at 
the shoulder,” the litter is held at a 45° angle, can- 
vas down, upon the right shoulder, the right hand 114 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Figure 9.—Nos. 3 halted in rear of line. MANUAL OF THE ARMY LITTER 
115 
Figure 10.—Nos. 3 stepping into line, litters at the vertical. 116 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Figure 11.—Procure, LITTER, completed. MANUAL OF THE ARMY LITTER 
117 
grasping the lower right foot of the litter, and the 
left hand is dropped to the side (fig. 12). In all 
motions from the shoulder or to the shoulder, the 
litter should be brought to the vertical position (fig. 
13) against the right shoulder, canvas to the rear, 
right hand grasping right lower foot of the litter, 
left forearm horizontal, and left hand steadying the 
litter against the shoulder. The vertical position 
should be taken automatically by the bearer when 
resuming his place in line and in any formation or 
movement in which there may be danger of the 
handles of the litter striking neighboring men, after 
which “at the shoulder” is resumed without 
command. 
(gr) to order litter.—Being at the shoulder, to 
order litter, the commands are: 1. order, 2. LITTER, 
At the command LITTER, the litter is brought to 
vertical position, the lower handles then dropped to 
the ground outside the right foot, canvas to the rear, 
right arm extended naturally, right hand grasping 
the poles, and left hand dropped to the side (fig. 14). 
(h) to shoulder litter.—(1) From the order.— 
Being at the order, to shoulder litter, the commands 
are; 1. shoulder, 2. LITTER. At the command 
LITTER, the litter is grasped with the left hand (fig. 
15) and lifted to the vertical position, then raised 
until the left wrist is level with the chin, when it 118 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Figure 12.—Litter at the shoulder. MANUAL OF THE ARMY LITTER 
119 
Figure 13.—Litter at the vertical. 120 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Figure 14.—Litter at the order. MANUAL OF THE ARMY LITTER 
121 
Figure 15.—Shoulder, LITTER, first step. 122 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
is laid, canvas down, upon the shoulder as described 
in paragraph 6-8 (/). 
(2) From the carry.—Being at the carry (para- 
graph 6-8 (i)), to shoulder litter, at the command 
LITTER, No. 3 advances to his former position in 
line, at the same time bringing the litter to the ver- 
tical, and then to the shoulder position. In this 
he is aided by No. 2 who lifts his end of the litter to 
the vertical as he steps backward into his former 
position in line. Nos. 1 and 4 stand fast. 
(1) xo carry litter.—(1) Being in lihe+ litters at 
the shoulder, to carry litter the commands are: 1. 
carry, 2. LITTER. At the corrfmand LITTER, each 
No. 3 brings his* litter to the vertical position, steps 
backward two paces (fig. 16), drops the upper handles 
forward and downward until the litter is in hori- 
zontal position, canvas up, and grasps the outside 
handle with his right hand; meanwhile, No. 2 steps 
directly to the front until he is opposite the front 
handles, when he grasps the outside handle with 
his left hand (fig. 17); Nos. 1 and 4 stand fast (fig. 
18); guides, if any, align on Nos. 1 and 4. 
(2) Being at the ground, to carry litter, at the 
same command, Nos. 3 and 2, using their right and 
left hands, respectively, stoop, grasp the outside 
handles (fig. 19) and raise the litter from the ground 
to the carry. MANUAL OF THE ARMY LITTER 
123 
Figure 16.—Carry, LITTER, from shoulder, first step. 
486912°—43——9 124 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
(3) Designation of litter ends.—That portion of 
the litter normally supported by No. 2 is the foot 
or front; that by No. 3, the head. With the excep- 
Figxjre 17.—Carry, LITTER, from shoulder, second step. 
tion of a few special movements, such as carrying 
patients up and down stairs, the same designation 
applies to loaded or unloaded litters. Further- MANUAL OF THE ARMY LITTER 
125 
more, the feet of the patient normally correspond 
to the foot of the litter. 
Figure 18.—Carry, LITTER, completed. 
(4) Unloaded litter in marching.—ln marching, 
the litter is usually at the carry, but when space 126 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
permits or squads are working independently, it may 
be at the shoulder. 
Figure 19.—Carry, LITTER, from ground, first step. MANUAL OF THE ARMY LITTER 
127 
(j) to ground litter.—Being at the carry, to 
ground litter, the commands are: 1. ground, 2. 
LITTER. At the command LITTER, Nos. 3 and 2 
Figure 20.—Litter at the ground. 
stoop and lower litter to the ground (canvas up), 
release the handles, and resume erect position, facing 
front (fig. 20). 128 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
(k) to change bearers.—(1). Being at the carry, 
in marching, to change bearers, the commands are: 
1. change bearers, 2. MARCH. At the command 
MARCH, Nos. 1 and 4 step to the right rear and left 
front of the litter, respectively, and grasp the handles 
relinquished by Nos. 2 and 3, who step to right and 
left center, respectively. 
(2) Being at the ground, closed, to execute 
change bearers, bearers move as at the carry, but 
Nos. 1 and 4 do not grasp the handles. 
(3) Being at the ground, open, to execute change 
bearers, Nos. 1 and 4 assume the rear and front 
posts, respectively, while Nos. 2 and 3 assume right 
and left posts, respectively, thus all describing part 
of a circle in a clockwise direction around the litter. 
(l) to open litter.—Being at the carry, litter 
strapped, the commands are: 1. open, 2. LITTER. 
At the command LITTER, all bearers face the litter 
(fig. 21); No. 4 supports the litter at the center, 
canvas up (fig. 22); Nos. 2 and 3 unfasten straps, 
button straps to their respective studs if it be a 
litter so equipped, and grasp the left handles with 
their left hands, leaving the litter suspended longi- 
tudinally, canvas to the right (fig. 23); Nos. 2 and 3, 
assisted by Nos. 1 and 4, extend the braces (fig. 24) 
and, supporting the litter horizontally, canvas up, 
lower it to the ground, when all resume their posi- MANUAL OF THE ARMY LITTER 
129 
tions at litter posts. If the litter is closed, but not 
strapped, so much of this directive as relates to the 
Figure 21.—Open, LITTER, first step. 
unfastening of the straps does not apply. If the 
litter is equipped with slings, Nos. 2 and 3 slip the 130 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
free loop of their respective slings upon the ring 
handle, the bight embracing the opposite handle. 
Figure 22.—Open, LITTER, second step. 
(m) to secure slings.—(Applicable to litter with 
slings attached. Unsecured slings tend to drag on 
the ground, catch on small obstacles, and, at times, MANUAL OF THE ARMY LITTER 
131 
actually interfere with loading ambulances and sim- 
ilar operations. This may be avoided by securing 
slings.) The litter being lowered, the commands 
Figure 23.—Open, LITTER, third step. 
are: 1. secure, 2. SLINGS. At the command SLINGS, 
Nos. 2 and 3 slip the loop end of the sling over the 
ring handle (fig. 25). Each drops the double end 132 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Over the free handle and brings it up around the 
handle, slipping the double end through the sling 
(fig. 26) and over the end of the handle (fig. 27). 
Figure 24.—Open, LITTER, fourth step. 
in) to close litter.—Being oven, the commands 
are: 1. close, 2. LITTER. At the command LITTER, 
Nos. 2 and 3 step outside the right front and left MANUAL OF THE ARMY LITTER 
133 
rear handles, respectively, and face inward; they 
stoop and, with their right hands, raise the litter 
by the left handles; they then fold the braces and, 
bringing the lower pole against the upper, support 
the litter at the carry. 
Figure 25.—Secure, SLINGS, first step. 134 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
(o) to strap the litter.—The litter being closed, 
the commands are: 1. strap, 2. LITTER. At the 
command LITTER, all face the litter; No. 4 sup- 
Figure 26.—Secure, SLINGS, second step 
ports the litter at the center (fig. 28); Nos. 2 and 3, 
assisted by No. 1, fold canvas by doubling it smoothly 
on top of the poles (fig. 29), release free loops of 
slings if litter has slings attached, place them on MANUAL OF THE ARMY LITTER 
135 
the canvas, buckles out, and secure all by the cross 
straps at each end, passing them through the loops 
of the slings (fig. 30), if any, when all take their 
posts at the carry. In the field, the litter should 
be carried strapped or closed, and opened only upon 
Figure 27.—Secure, SLINGS, completed 
reaching the patient. Being oven, the litter may 
be closed and strapped at the one command strap, 
LITTER, in which case the procedures are executed 
in sequence. 
(p) TO BRING LITTER SQUAD INTO LINE. During 
litter instruction, it may be desired to move the 136 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
squad, without litter, to another point. Bearers be- 
ing at posts with litter at the ground, the commands 
are: 1. form, 2. RANK. At the command RANK, 
Figure 28.—Strap, LITTER, first step. 
No. 2 advances one pace and the remaining bearers 
move forward and align themselves on him, in 
regular order (fig. 31). MANUAL OF THE ARMY LITTER 
137 
(q) to resume litter posts.—Normal bearer posts, 
with the litter at the ground, may be recovered 
at any time by the commands: 1. litter, 2. POSTS. 
At the command POSTS, all members of the squad 
Figure 29.—Strap, LITTER, second step. 138 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
move by the nearest route and resume posts as 
shown in figure 20. 
Figure 30.—Strap, LITTER, third step. 
(r) TO LIFT OPEN LITTER, LOADED OR UNLOADED.—(I) 
Being at the ground with hearers at litter posts, to 
lift the metal pole litter, utilizing the utility straps, MANUAL OF THE ARMY LITTER 
139 
the commands are: 1. prepare to lift, 2. LIFT. At 
the first command, Nos. 2 and 3 remove their utility 
straps from their pouches, attach them to their sus- 
penders, then stoop and grasp handles firmly. 
Meanwhile, Nos. 1 and 4 face litter, stoop and grasp 
adjacent pole. At the command LIFT, Nos. 2 and 
3 arise slowly, assisted in lifting by Nos. 1 and 4, 
Pigure 31.—Squad at form, RANK 
436912 --43 10 140 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
following which Nos. 1 and 4 adjust the utility straps 
of Nos. 2 and 3, respectively, then resume their 
posts. The litter may be lifted without utility straps 
by prefixing without utility straps to the command. 
(2) Being at the ground with bearers at litter 
posts, to lift the wooden pole litter, utilizing the 
slings, the commands are: 1. prepare to lift, 
2. LIFT. At the first command, Nos. 2 and 3 stoop, 
slip the slings off the handles, and place them over 
their shoulders; they then replace the free loop upon 
its handle and firmly grasp the handles of the litter. 
At the same time, Nos. 1 and 4 face the litter, stoop, 
and grasp the adjacent pole (fig. 32). At the com- 
mand LIFT all lift the litter, arising slowly until 
erect. No. 4 then advances to the side of No. 2 and 
No. 1 steps backward obliquely to the side of No. 3, 
and after adjusting slings, lengthening or shorten- 
ing as necessary to level the litter, resume their 
posts (fig. 33). The litter may be lifted without 
slings by prefixing without slings to the command. 
(s) to march forward.—Being at the lift, the com- 
mands are: 1. forward, 2. MARCH. At the command 
MARCH, No. 2 steps off with the left foot, No. 3 
with the right, both taking short, sliding steps of 
about 20 inches, to avoid jolting and to secure uni- 
form motion of the litter. Nos. 1 and 4 step off 
with the left foot, employing the normal pace at a 
cadence to conform with the progress of Nos. 2 and 3. MANUAL OF THE ARMY LITTER 
141 
Figure 32.—Squad at prepare to lift, with slings. 142 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Figure 33.—Litter lifted, with slings. MANUAL OF THE ARMY LITTER 
143 
(t) to lower litter.—Being at the lift, the com- 
mands are: 1. lower, 2. LITTER. At the command 
LITTER, Nos. 2 and 3 slowly lower litter to the 
ground, disengage utility straps from litter handles, 
and resume erect position. If the litter is equipped 
with slings, Nos. 2 and 3, after lowering litter, seize 
the free loop and remove the bight of their respec- 
tive slings from their shoulders, place loops upon 
ring handles, the bights embracing opposite handles, 
and resume erect position. The open litter should 
be lifted and lowered slowly without jerks, both ends 
simultaneously, the rear bearer moving in accord 
with the front bearer so as to maintain a horizontal 
canvas. The open litter, unloaded, for purposes of 
instruction should be handled as a loaded litter, and 
as soon as the men are familiar with the handling of 
the unloaded litter, instruction should be given with 
the loaded litter. CHAPTER YII 
TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
Section I.—TRANSPORTATION WITH ARMY 
LITTER 
7-1. General.—(a) patients for purposes of in- 
struction.—For purposes of instruction with loaded 
litters, certain men are designated “patients.” To 
make the instruction more realistic and to instruct 
in the handling of different types of injuries, “pa- 
tients” should wear bandages and splints to simulate 
actual disabilities. In early periods of instruction, 
the “patients” will be placed on the ground at suit- 
able intervals near the line of litters, first with the 
I leads and later with the feet toward the line. As 
the instruction progresses, the positions may be 
varied and, lastly, dispersed or concealed in such 
positions as they would occupy on a battlefield. 
When “patients” are loaded on litters, their arms 
and accoutrements are carried by Nos. 1 and 4 or 
placed on the litter. 
(b) arrangement for instruction.—Several squads 
may be instructed by the same individual at the same 
time, or each squad may be instructed separately by 
an instructor or by the squad leader (No. 1). In the 
145 146 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
latter case squad leaders assume charge at a direc- 
tive by the instructor or the unit commander. At 
the signal for assembly the squads form in line, 
lower litters, and come to rest. The “patients,” if 
still on the litters, are then divested of dressings and 
splints, and resume their posts. Further movements 
are performed as directed by the instructor. 
(c) GENERAL RULES FOR MOVING PATIENTS. (1) In 
moving a patient, either with or without the litter, 
every movement should be made deliberately and 
as gently as possible, care being taken not to jar the 
injured part. The command STEADY shall be used 
to prevent undue haste and other irregularities. 
(2) The rear bearer should watch the movements 
of the front bearer and time his own with them, so 
as to insure ease and steadiness of action. 
(3) As a rule, the patient should be carried on 
the litter feet foremost, but in going uphill or up 
stairs his head should be in front. 
(4) In case of fracture of the lower extremities, 
he is carried uphill or up stairs (or ladders) feet 
foremost and downhill head foremost, to prevent the 
weight of the body pressing upon the injured part. 
(5) In passing obstacles and ditches, the litter 
must be kept level at all times. 
7-2. To Load and Unload Litter.—(a) position 
for lifting patient.—The patient having been lo- TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
147 
cated, the general nature of his wounds determined, 
and the litter being open and available, to place 
bearers in proper position to lift patient, the com- 
mands are: 1. right (left) side, 2. POSTS. At the 
command POSTS, bearers take position as follows: 
No. 2 at the right (left) ankle; No. 3 at the right 
(left) shoulder; Nos. 1 and 4 at the right (left) and 
left (right) hips, respectively, all facing the patient 
(fig. 34). 
(b) TO LIFT PATIENT AND PLACE LITTER IN POSITION.— 
The bearers being at posts, to lift patient prepara- 
tory to placing him on the litter, the commands are: 
1. lift, 2. PATIENT. At the command lift, all 
bearers kneel on knees nearest the patient’s feet; 
No. 2 passes both forearms under the patient’s legs, 
carefully supporting the fracture, if there is one; 
Nos. 1 and 4 place their arms under the small of the 
back and the thighs, not locking hands; No. 3 passes 
one hand under the patient’s neck to the farther 
armpit, with the other supporting the nearest shoul- 
der (fig. 35). At the command PATIENT, all lift 
together, slowly and carefully, and place the patient 
upon the knees of the three bearers on the same 
side (fig. 36). As soon as he is firmly supported 
there, the bearer on the opposite side (No. 1 or 4) 
relinquishes his hold, passes quickly by the nearest 
route to the litter which he takes up by the middle, 148 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
one pole in each hand, and, returning rapidly, places 
it under the patient and against the ankles of the 
other three bearers (fig. 37). 
Figure 34.—Squad at left side, POSTS. TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
149 
(c) to lower patient on litter.—The patient be- 
ing on the knees of three bearers, and the litter in 
proper position to receive the patient, the commands 
are: 1. lower, 2. PATIENT. At the command 
lower, the free bearer (No. 1 or 4) resumes his 
former kneeling position opposite the other three 
bearers and prepares to assist in lowering the pa- 
tient. At the command PATIENT, the patient is 
lowered gently upon the litter, made as comfortable 
Figure 35.—Squad at LIFT. 150 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
as possible, then without further orders all bearers 
rise and resume their positions at litter posts. 
(d) to unload litter.—The patient being on the 
litter, to unload litter, the same commands are given 
and the actions of the bearers are the same as shown 
in paragraphs 7-2 (a) and (b), with the exception 
that after the patient has been lifted to the knees 
of the three bearers, the free bearer removes the 
Figure 36.—First step after the command PATIENT. TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
151 
Figure 37.—Litter being placed beneath the patient 152 
HOSPITAL CORPS BRILL BOOK 
litter from beneath the patient instead of placing 
it under him. 
7-3. To Load and Unload Litter with Three Bear- 
ers.—ln the absence of one man from the litter 
squad, No. 3 or 2 is replaced by No. 4 or 1, respec- 
tively, while Nos. 1 and 4 replace each other. With 
three bearers, the litter is placed as usual and, at 
the prescribed commands, the bearers take their 
proper positions. The patient, having been lifted 
by the three bearers, is supported on the knees of 
the two on one side, while the third (No. 1 or 4) 
places the litter in position (fig. 38). In like manner, 
the patient is lowered on the litter (fig. 39). To 
unload the litter, the maneuvers are reversed. 
7-4. To Load and Unload Litter with Two Bear- 
ers.—(a) with bearers on the same side.—At the 
command right (left) side, POSTS, Nos. 2 and 3 
take positions at patient’s right (left) thigh and 
shoulder, respectively (fig. 40). At the command 
LIFT, the bearers kneel on knees nearest the pa- 
tient’s feet; No. 2 passes his arms beneath the 
patient’s hips and knees; No. 3 passes his arms be- 
neath the patient’s shoulders and small of his back 
(fig. 41). At the command PATIENT, they lift to- 
gether, raising the patient upon their knees, then, 
readjusting their holds, rise to their feet and carry 
patient to the side of the litter. At the command TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
153 
Figure 38.—Three bearers loading litter. 154 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Figure 39.—Three bearers lowering patient on litter. TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
155 
lower, PATIENT, the bearers kneel and place the 
patient on their knees (fig. 42), stoop forward and 
place him on the litter (fig. 43), then rise and as- 
Figure 40.—Two bearers at left side, POSTS 
486912°—43 11 156 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Figure 41.—Position of two bearers at preparatory 
command lift (bearers on same side). TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
157 
sume the position of litter posts without command. 
To unload, posts are taken in the same way, at the 
same commands. 
(b) with bearers on opposite sides.—In case the 
patient is conscious and able to cooperate in the 
Figure 42.-—-Two bearers at command PATIENT (bearers 
on same side). 
movement, a method whereby the bearers take posi- 
tions on opposite sides of the patient may be em- 
ployed. To carry out this movement the commands 
are: 1. both sides, 2. POSTS. At the command 158 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
POSTS, Nos. 2 and 3 take positions at the patient’s 
right and left hips respectively, facing the patient 
(fig. 44). At the command lift, bearers kneel on the 
knees nearest the patient’s feet, raise him to a sitting 
position, and pass their arms around his back and 
Figure 43.—Two bearers placing patient on litter (bearers 
on same side). 
under his thighs, locking hands. The patient, if 
able, clasps his arms around the bearers’ necks 
(fig. 45). At the command PATIENT, they lift the 
patient, both rising together, and carry him to the 
center of the litter (fig. 46). At the command TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
159 
Figure 44.—Two bearers at both sides, POSTS. 160 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
lower, PATIENT, they stoop and lower the patient 
upon the litter in sitting position <fig. 47). The 
patient releases his hold on the bearers’ necks and 
Figure 45.—Two bearers ready to lift patient (bearers on 
opposite sides). 
both bearers then lay him flat upon the litter, head 
toward No. 3, after which they take the position of 
litter posts without command. Unloading is per- 
formed, in reverse order, at the same commands. TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
161 
Figure 46.—Two bearers ready to lower patient (bearers 
on opposite sides). 162 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
7-5. To Load and Unload Back Cases.—To avoid 
aggravating the condition of patients with actual or 
Figure 47.—Two bearers placing patient on litter (bearers 
on opposite sides). 
suspected back injuries, the procedure outlined next 
shall be followed, taking special care in spine cases. TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
163 
(a) to place the patient face down.—The patient 
being flat on his back, a blanket rolled or folded 
lengthwise to two-thirds its normal width is placed 
alongside the patient, the roll or fold in close prox- 
imity to his body (fig. 48). To place the patient face 
down, the commands are; 1. roll, 2. PATIENT. At 
the command roll. No. 2 kneels at the patient’s feet, 
firmly grasping the patient’s ankles; No. 3 kneels at 
the patient’s head, hands grasping the patient’s chin 
and occiput (back of head). No. 1 kneels by the side 
of the patient, opposite the blanket, while No. 4 
places an open litter in close proximity, and prepares 
to assist No. 1. At the command PATIENT, Nos. 2 
and 3 exert moderate traction, while Nos. 1 and 4 
gently roll the patient over on the blanket, face down, 
arms extended over his head, forearms supporting 
his head (figs. 49 and 50). 
(b) to place patient on litter.—The commands 
are: 1. lift, 2. PATIENT, and 1. lower, 2. PATIENT. 
At the command lift. No. 2 grasps the lower end of 
the blanket, No. 3 the left half of the upper end and 
the upper half of the left side, and No. 1 grasps the 
right half of the upper end and the upper half of the 
right side. At the command PATIENT, Nos. 1,2, and 
3 lift the blanket and patient, while No. 4 places the 
open litter beneath the patient (fig. 51). At the 
commands lower, PATIENT, Nos. 1,2, and 3, as- 164 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
sisted by No. 4, lower the patient gently down on 
the litter. 
Figure 48.—Rolled blanket alongside back case. 
(C) TO UNLOAD PATIENT FROM LITTER. To Unload the 
patient from the litter, the same maneuvers, at the 
same commands are executed in reverse order. TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
165 
7-6. To Carry Loaded Litter by Four Bearers.— 
If it is desired that the four bearers carry the loaded 
litter, while marching, the commands are; 1. by 
four bearers, 2. carry, 3. LITTER. At the command 
LITTER, No. 1 steps backward to the right rear, No. 
4 forward to the left front, and each grasps the 
handle nearest him, relinquished by Nos. 2 and 3, 
respectively, who, retaining their grasps on the other 
Figure 49.—Rolling back case onto blanket. 166 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
handles, move to the outside (fig. 52). Normal posi- 
tions are resumed by the command litter, POSTS. 
7-7. To Pass Obstacles.—(a) general.—Obstacles 
Figure 50.—Back case face down on blanket. 
include fences, walls, cuts, ditches, running streams, 
or other natural, or artificial impediments. Ob- 
stacles should be avoided when feasible, otherwise TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
167 
they must be surmounted. As orders for surmount- 
ing separate obstacles are neither necessary nor 
practicable, and flexibility in the execution of orders 
Figure 51.—-Placing back case on litter. 
concerning obstacles must be maintained, common 
sense dictates the details of action best suited to 
the situation with which the bearers may be con- 
fronted. 168 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Figure 52.—Four bearers carrying loaded litter. TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
169 
(b) to pass minor obstacles.—For crossing wide, 
shallow streams, rough or cultivated ground, or simi- 
lar obstacles, the command is OBSTACLE. At this 
command, Nos. 1 and 4 close in, grasp the centers of 
the adjacent poles, and give support until the ob- 
stacle has been surmounted (fig. 53), then they re- 
sume their posts without command. 
(c) to pass major obstacles.—To pass over fences, 
ditches, and similar obstacles, when Nos. 2 and 3 
must entirely release the litter to cross such ob- 
stacle, the orders are: 1. obstacle, 2. MARCH. At 
the command obstacle. Nos. 1 and 4 move as out- 
lined in paragraph 7-2 (b). At the command 
MARCH, No. 2 relinquishes his grasp on the front 
handles, removes the slings from the shoulders, and 
places them on the litter (or disengages the utility 
straps), and crosses the obstacle (fig. 54). The litter 
being advanced by the other three bearers, No. 2 
grasps the front handles and, after further aiding 
in advancing the litter, assists No. 3 in steadying it 
while Nos. 1 and 4 cross the obstacle (fig. 55). The 
litter is then lifted over and across the obstacle by 
Nos. 1,2, and 4, while No. 3 crosses and resumes his 
grasp on the rear handles. Nos. 1 and 4, after assist- 
ing Nos. 2 and 3 in adjusting slings, if any, resume 
their posts without command. 170 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
(d) TO SURMOUNT OBSTACLES OVER 5 FEET HIGH.— 
The squad being in position of by four bearers, 
can-y, litter, to surmount an obstacle over 5 feet 
Figure 53.—Carrying litter over minor obstacle. 
high, the commands are: 1. raise, 2. LITTER. At 
the command LITTER, the litter is raised carefully 
to the level of the obstacle and advanced until the TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
171 
front feet of the litter have cleared, or become well 
anchored on, the obstacle (fig. 56); Nos. 2 and 4 
then clear the obstacle, assist in advancing the litter 
Figure 54.—Crossing low obstacle, first step. 
to the rear feet, then steady it while Nos. 1 and 3 
clear the obstacle and resume their grasp on the 
486912 °—43 12 172 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
rear handles. Upon clearing the obstacle the litter 
is lowered to its former level without command. 
Figure 55.—Crossing low obstacle, second step. 
7-8. To Carry Loaded Litter Up or Down Stairs 
(or Ladders).—(a) up stairs carry.—Normally a 
loaded litter is carried up stairs head first. The 
litter is marched to the foot of the stairs in the TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
173 
Figure 56.—Surmounting obstacle over 5 feet high. 174 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
usual manner, wheeled about, and halted (fig. 57). 
To negotiate the stairs, the commands are; 
1. prepare for stairs, 2. MARCH. At the com- 
mand prepare for stairs, Nos. 1 and 4 face in- 
ward, advance to the center of the litter, and sup- 
port it by grasping a pole with both hands; Nos. 2 
and 3 slip free loops of slings off handles (or disen- 
gage utility straps), face about, and again grasp the 
handles (fig. 58); No. 4 then steps to the handle 
nearest him, at the foot of the litter, which he grasps 
firmly with both hands (fig. 59), while No. 2 grasps 
the opposite handle. At the command MARCH, the 
litter is carried upward by Nos. 2,3, and 4 (fig. 60), 
the rear bearers being responsible for maintaining 
the level of the litter. No. 1 falls out, accompanies 
the litter, and renders assistance as required. When 
only three bearers are present, the litter must be 
lowered before the first command. After the stairs 
have been negotiated, normal positions are resumed 
by the command litter, POSTS. Or, if only three 
bearers be present, the litter must be lowered before 
resuming normal positions. 
(b) down stairs carry.—Normally a loaded litter 
is carried down stairs feet first. The loaded litter is 
carried to the head of the stairs in the usual manner 
and halted. At the command prepare for stairs, 
No, 4 advances to the left front handle, which he TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
175 
Figure 57.—Up stairs carry, first step. 176 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Figure 58.—Up stairs carry, second step TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
177 
Figure 59.—Up stairs carry, third step. 178 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Figure 60.—Up stairs carry, fourth step. TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
179 
Figure 61.—Down stairs carry. 180 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
grasps firmly with both hands, while No. 2 grasps the 
opposite handle (fig. 61). At the command MARCH, 
the litter is carried downward, Nos. 2 and 4 keeping 
the litter as nearly level as possible, No. 3 aided by 
No. 1, carefully observing the patient to insure no 
untoward incident occurs during the descent. Upon 
reaching the foot of the stairs, normal positions 
are resumed by the commands litter, POSTS. 
(c) WITH FRACTURES OF THE LOWER EXTREMITY. 
When the patient being transported has a fracture 
of the lower extremity, or if for any reason it be de- 
sired to carry the patient up stairs feet first, or down 
stairs head first, the bearers are reversed, in the 
former case No. 2 becoming the front bearer, in the 
latter, No. 3. 
Section 2—TRANSPORTATION WITH NAVY 
LITTER 
7-9. General.—The metal litter known as the Navy 
litter and commonly spoken of as the modified Stokes 
splint stretcher, is used principally for transporting 
the sick or injured on board ship, from ship to ship, 
from ship to shore or vice versa, and by airplane. 
For moving large numbers of sick or injured by air 
it may, however, be preferable to use the Army litter. 
The Navy litter (fig. 62) is essentially a metal 
basket the lower half of which is divided to form TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
181 
Figure 62.—The Navy litter. 182 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Figure 63.—Loaded Navy litter (tilted). TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
183 
two compartments that conform, in general, to the 
lower extremities of a patient. Its chief advantage 
is the security afforded a patient carried in it, espe- 
cially when the litter is tilted (fig. 63). This litter 
is approximately 7 feet long, 23 inches wide and 8 
inches deep, weighs about 20 pounds, and it is re- 
quired to be so constructed as to safely carry a load 
of at least 500 pounds when suspended by either 
two-point or four-point suspension by lines attached 
to the rails. 
The frame of the Navy litter is made of steel 
tubing and consists of a top rail and bottom run- 
ners, with cross ribs, diagonal braces, and longitu- 
dinal ridge tube separating the two leg gutters, and 
a side rail and supporting struts. Within the frame 
is a poultry-wire net lining cut and shaped to con- 
form to the inside contour of the litter and secured 
to the side rail, thereby leaving the top rail avail- 
able for use in handling or carrying. The trunk 
section of the litter has a rack or bottom of four 
longitudinal wood slats resting on the cross ribs and 
bolted to two wood end pieces supported on the run- 
ners in such manner that the rack bottom will not 
slip when the litter is suspended vertically. 
To the top rail of the litter are attached five 
cotton-webbing straps, each 66 inches long and pro- 
vided with a buckle of the quick-release type. Two 184 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
of these straps can be used as stirrup slings for the 
feet or as side slings passing under the perineum to 
support the patient when the litter is in a perpendic- 
ular position; the others are used to secure the 
patient in the litter. 
The Navy litter can be carried by two, three, or 
four bearers and can be pushed or pulled along on 
the runners at the foot by one bearer supporting it 
at the head (fig. 64). The bottom runners permit its 
use as a sled in passing along a passageway or up or 
down a ladder or a plank in a hatchway between 
decks, stairs in a building, etc. When suspended at 
its head from a tackle the loaded litter can be raised 
or lowered in a perpendicular position with little or 
no discomfort to the patient, and when suspended at 
four points from a tackle it can be safely raised or 
lowered in a horizontal position. 
7-10. Handling.—To use the Navy litter effectively 
and in order that they can instruct others in its use 
it is essential that hospital corpsmen be trained in 
the methods of handling it. The training required 
can be best obtained through drill in the actual 
handling of the litter and in its loading and unload- 
ing, and must be given for a long enough period of 
time to develop proficiency and uniformity in the 
proper methods of handling the litter. Drill with 
the Navy litter is not to be considered a precision TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
185 
Figure 64.—Navy litter handled by one bearer. 186 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
drill, and should be given only to facilitate instruc- 
tion in its use. 
Instruction or drill in handling the unloaded Navy 
litter is not necessary for the reason that it would 
be a duplication of the instruction in the use of the 
Army litter. Instruction in handling the Navy litter 
may be begun with the litter unloaded and many of 
the formations and commands in Section 2 of Chap- 
ter VI will be found to be suitable for that purpose. 
The paragraphs that follow contain instructions 
for handling the loaded Navy litter. Four bearers 
should be used in loading and unloading the litter 
but three may be used if four are not available. 
Loading and unloading with two bearers is not recom- 
mended. The commands given in these paragraphs 
may or may not be used in the handling of actual 
patients. For purposes of drill in loading and un- 
loading the litter certain personnel must be desig- 
nated as patients and directed to lie down at various 
places. 
Four Bearers. 
7-11. Designation of Bearers.—During instruc- 
tion with four bearers each bearer takes position and 
executes the movements of the drill in accordance 
with the numerical designation given to him. The 
numbers and position of the bearers are as follows: 
Number 1 at center of right side of litter, Number TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
187 
2 at foot of litter, Number 3 at head of litter, and 
Number 4 at center of left side of litter. 
7-12. The Litter Being Lowered, to Load Navy 
Litter.—(a) The patient having been located, the 
commands are: 1. right (left) side, 2. POSTS. At 
the command POSTS, No. 1 bearer takes position at 
the patient’s right (left) hip, No. 2 at the right (left) 
ankle, No. 3 at the right (left) shoulder, and No. 4 
at the left (right) hip, all facing the patient (see 
fig. 34). 
(b) TO LIFT PATIENT AND PLACE LITTER IN POSITION.— 
The bearers being in position to lift patient prepara- 
tory to placing him in the litter, the commands are; 
1. prepare to lift, 2. LIFT. At the command pre- 
pare to lift, all bearers face towards the patient and 
kneel on the knee nearest his feet; Nos. 1 and 4 pass 
their arms under the small of the back and thighs 
of the patient, not locking hands; No. 2 passes both 
forearms under the patient’s legs, carefully sup- 
porting the fracture if there be one; and No. 3 passes 
one hand under the patient’s neck to the farther 
armpit and supports the nearer shoulder with the 
other. At the command LIFT, all bearers lift to- 
gether, slowly and carefully, and place the patient 
upon the knees of the three bearers on the same side 
(see fig. 36). As soon as the patient is firmly sup- 
ported there, the bearer on the opposite side (No. 1 
486912°—43 13 188 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
or 4) relinquishes his hold, rises, and passes quickly 
by the shortest route to the litter, which he picks up 
by the middle and, returning rapidly, places it under 
the patient and against the other bearers’ lower 
shins (fig. 65). He then rises and stands fast in his 
position. 
(c) to place patient in litter.—The patient be- 
ing on the knees of three bearers and the litter being 
in proper position to receive him, to place the pa- 
tient in the litter the commands are: 1. lower. 2. 
PATIENT. At the command lower, the free bearer 
(No. 1 or 4) stoops or kneels and prepares to as- 
sist the other bearers in lowering the patient. At 
the command PATIENT the body of the patient is 
lowered gently and carefully into the litter, the legs 
being supported at an easy angle above the ridge sep- 
arating the gutters. The free bearer then places 
himself opposite the No. 2 bearer, kneels, and assists 
in lowering the patient’s legs into the gutters. In 
case one leg is injured the sound leg is lowered first, 
and in all cases the legs should be lowered after the 
body. After securing the patient in the litter the 
bearers resume their position at right (left) side, 
posts without command. The patient being in the 
litter, all bearers assist in securing him with the 
canvas straps provided, No. 3 securing the strap 
over the thorax, No. 2 securing the strap over the TRANSPORTATION OP SICK AND INJURED 
189 
Figure 65.—Navy litter being placed beneath patient. 190 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
lower extremities, and Nos. 1 and 4 securing the 
straps, on each side of the litter, used as stirrup 
slings for the feet or as side slings passed under the 
perineum if the patient is unconscious or has both 
legs injured. The fifth strap is used where necessary 
by the bearer most conveniently located to apply it. 
When immobilization of any part of the body of 
the patient is necessary, the bearer nearest the part 
to be immobilized performs that duty, using band- 
ages, etc., as required. In case the patient is uncon- 
scious or both legs are injured, a bandage should be 
passed behind the neck, over the shoulders, and 
under the arms, and secured to the wire mesh. 
7-13. To Carry Loaded Navy Litter.—(o) Prepara- 
tory to lifting and carrying or marching with the 
loaded Navy litter the bearers take positions at the 
head and foot of the litter. To take those positions 
the commands are: 1. litter, 2. POSTS. At the 
command POSTS, No. 4 faces left and steps to the 
foot of the litter opposite No. 2 who has faced right, 
No. 3 steps to the left side of the head of the litter 
and faces right opposite No. 1 who has faced left, 
stepped to the head of the litter, and faced about. 
The bearers being at litter posts, to carry loaded 
Navy litter the commands are: 1. prepare to lift, 
2. LIFT. At the command prepare to lift, all bear- 
ers stoop and seize the top rail, Nos. 4 and 3 with TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
191 
their right hands, Nos. 2 and 1 with their left hands. 
At the command LIFT all rise slowly and lift the 
loaded litter (fig. 66). 
(b) to march forward.—Being at the lift to march 
forward with the loaded litter the commands are: 
1. forward, 2. MARCH. At the command MARCH 
Nos. 2 and 4 step off with the left foot, Nos. 1 and 3 
with the right, all bearers taking short, sliding steps 
of about 20 inches, to avoid jolting and to secure 
uniform motion of the litter. 
(c) On approaching a doorway too narrow for 
the regular formation to pass through, the bearers 
automatically shift positions as follows: No. 4 re- 
leases his hold and assists No. 2 to shift in front 
of the foot of the litter which he grasps with both 
hands; No. 4 precedes the litter through the doorway 
and Nos. 2 and 4 resume their normal positions as 
soon as practicable; then No. 3 releases his hold and 
assists No. 1 to shift behind the head of the litter 
which he grasps with both hands, No. 3 follows the 
litter through doorway and Nos. 1 and 3 resume their 
normal positions as soon as practicable. 
(d) to lower loaded navy litter.—Being at the 
lift, to lower loaded litter, the commands are; 
1. lower, 2. LITTER. At the command LITTER, 
all bearers slowly lower litter to the ground and 
resume erect position without command. 192 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Figure 66.—Four bearers carrying loaded Navy litter. TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
193 
7-14. The Litter Being Lowered, to Unload Navy 
Litter.— (a) The bearers being at litter posts, to 
unload Navy litter the commands are; 1. right 
(left) side, 2. POSTS. At the command POSTS the 
bearers take positions as for loading the litter and 
release the canvas straps and bandages, if any. 
(b) TO LIFT PATIENT FROM LITTER AND REMOVE LIT- 
TER.—The bearers being in position to lift the patient 
from the litter, the commands are; 1. prepare to 
lift, 2. LIFT. At the command prepare to lift, No. 4 
(or 1) passes to a point opposite No. 2 and all bearers 
face towards the patient and kneel on the knees near- 
est his feet: Nos. 4 (or 1) and 2 raise the patient’s legs 
from the gutters of the litter, No. 2 passes both fore- 
arms under the patient’s legs, carefully supporting 
the fracture if there be one, and No. 4 (or 1) relin- 
quishes his hold, rises, and then kneels at the pa- 
tient’s left (right) hip; Nos. 1 and 4 pass their arms 
under the small of the back and thighs of the patient, 
not locking hands; and No. 3 passes one hand under 
the patient’s neck to the farther armpit and supports 
the nearer shoulder with the other. At the com- 
mand LIFT, Nos. 1,4, and 3 raise the body of the 
patient from the litter and place him on the knees 
of the three bearers on the same side. As soon as 
the patient is firmly supported there, the free bearer 
(No. 4 or 1) removes the litter, and then assists the 194 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
other three bearers to rise to a standing position 
with the patient in, their arms. 
(c) The patient being in the arms of the three 
bearers, with the fourth bearer assisting where neces- 
sary, he may be placed on a bed, operating table, cot, 
another litter, etc., as directed. 
7-15. To Hoist Loaded Navy Litter Through a 
Hatchway with Ladder Unshipped.—After the loaded 
Navy litter has been slowly lowered to the deck in the 
position best adopted for hoisting, Nos. 1 and 3 make 
their way to the deck above and send down a rope’s 
end which is attached by No. 2 or 4 to the top rail, 
in the center, at the head of the litter. At the 
proper time Nos. 1 and 3 pull on the rope from the 
deck above. As soon as the head begins to rise Nos. 
2 and 4 take hold of the foot of the litter on their 
respective sides, keeping it as nearly in a horizontal 
position as possible while assisting in lifting. When 
the head of the litter can be reached with the hands 
from the deck above, the Nos. 1 and 3 draw the litter 
over the coaming of the hatchway until the foot of 
the litter rests there, then the Nos. 2 and 4 make 
their way to the deck above. No. lor 3 unbends the 
rope’s end and all bearers resume their positions 
at Carry Litter. Only such commands as are essen- 
tial in accomplishing this movement need be given. TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
195 
7-16. To Lower Loaded Navy Litter Through a 
Hatchway with Ladder Unshipped.—The foot of the 
loaded litter is lowered to the coaming of the hatch- 
way, and Nos. 2 and 4 release their holds and assist 
in sliding the litter over the coaming until it rests 
on its middle. Then one of the free bearers, either 
No. 2 or 4, fastens the rope’s end to the top rail, in 
the center, at the head of the litter while Nos. 1 and 3 
hold the litter in place. After the rope’s end is made 
fast Nos. 2 and 4 make their way to the deck below. 
At the proper time Nos. 1 and 3 slide the litter over 
the coaming, allowing the foot to drop slowly until 
it can be reached by Nos. 2 and 4. After Nos. 2 and 4 
have taken hold of the foot of the litter on their 
respective sides, Nos. 1 and 3 lift the head of the 
litter clear of the coaming by the attached rope 
and lower slowly, Nos. 2 and 4 steadying and keep- 
ing the litter in as nearly a horizontal position as 
possible, while easing it to the deck below. Either 
No. 2 or 4 unbends the rope’s end while Nos. 1 and 3 
make their way to the deck below. When all bearers 
are assembled they resume their positions at Carry 
Litter. Only such commands as are essential in 
accomplishing this movement need be given. 
7-17. To Transport Loaded Navy Litter from Be- 
low to Upper Deck with Ladder Shipped.—(a) The 196 
head of the loaded Navy litter is placed on the 
highest step of the ladder that can be reached by 
Nos. 1 and 3 bearers, after which they release their 
holds and make their way to the deck above. Mean- 
while, the litter is supported in this position by Nos. 
2 and 4. After reaching the deck above, either No. 
1 or 3 takes a rope’s end down the ladder, attaches 
it to the center of the top rail at the head of the 
litter, and returns to the deck above. Then Nos. 1 
and 3 pull on the rope attached to the litter while 
Nos. 2 and 4 gradually lower the foot until the entire 
length of the litter rests on the ladder. No. 2 then 
makes his way up to the deck above and assists in 
pulling the loaded litter up the ladder. No. 4 fol- 
lows the litter and keeps the foot of it from bumping 
against the steps. When the head of the litter 
reaches the hatch coaming the litter is drawn over 
it by the three bearers on deck until the foot rests 
there; then No. 4 makes his way to the deck above 
and while Nos. 1 and 3 support the litter in this 
position, No. 2 unbends the rope’s end. When all 
bearers are assembled they resume their positions 
at Carry Litter. Only such commands as are essen- 
tial in accomplishing this movement need be given. 
(b) With the ladder unshipped, a board (or 
boards) may be used in place of the ladder, and the 
same procedure followed. 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
197 
7-18. To Transport Loaded Navy Litter from 
Above to Deck Below with Ladder Shipped.—(a) 
The foot of the loaded litter is lowered to the coam- 
ing of the hatchway and Nos. 2 and 4 release their 
holds and assists in sliding the litter over the coam- 
ing until it rests on its middle. Then one of the free 
bearers, either No. 2 or 4, fastens the rope’s end to 
the top rail, in the center, at the head of the litter, 
while Nos. 1 and 3 hold the litter in place. After 
the rope’s end is made fast Nos. 2 and 4 make their 
way to the deck below. At the proper time Nos. 1 
and 3 slide the litter over the coaming allowing the 
foot to drop slowly, and Nos. 2 and 4, who are sta- 
tioned on the ladder below, assist in lowering the 
litter until it lies flat on the ladder, in which posi- 
tion it is slid to the deck below. The No. 1 bearer 
follows the litter down the ladder, easing it along 
by means of the attached rope, preventing the head 
of the litter from bumping the ladder steps. Nos. 
2 and 4 grasp the foot of the litter on their respec- 
tive sides and slightly raise it as it slides over the 
deck. No. 3 follows No. 1 down the ladder. When 
the litter rests its entire length on the deck, No. 3 
unbends the rope’s end and all bearers assume the 
position of Carry Litter. Only such commands as 
are essential in accomplishing this movement need 
be given. 198 
(b) With the ladder unshipped, a board (or 
boards) may be used in place of the ladder, and 
the same procedure followed. 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Three Bearers. 
While the loaded Navy litter may be handled by 
three bearers (fig. 67), four always should be used 
when possible. However, if only three bearers are 
available their duties are the same as those of Nos. 
1,2, and 3 with four bearers, No. 2 taking over the 
duties of the absent bearer, No. 4. 
When three bearers are used, only such orders are 
given by the bearer in charge as are necessary to 
direct the movements. 
Two Bearers. 
The loaded Navy litter can be carried for short 
distances by two bearers (fig. 68), one at each end. 
It can also be loaded by two men but the procedure 
is most unsatisfactory and is not recommended. 
When only two bearers are used to handle the Navy 
litter they are not designated by number but the 
two men take over the duties of the four bearers. 
In this instance only such orders are given by the 
bearer in charge as are necessary to direct the 
movements. TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
199 
Positions of Bearers Reversed. 
Normally, a loaded litter is carried up a ladder, 
stairs, etc., head first. But when the patient has a 
Figure 67.—Three bearers carrying loaded Navy litter. 
fracture of a lower extremity, or if for any reason 
it be desired to carry the patient up a ladder feet 
first, or down head first, the movements of the bear- 200 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Figure 68.—Two bearers carrying loaded Navy litter. TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
201 
ers are reversed. In the former case Nos. 2 and 4 
become the front bearers, in the latter Nos. 1 and 3. 
Section 3 .—TRANSPORTATION WITHOUT 
LITTER 
7-19. General.—Situations frequently arise where 
a patient must be transported without a litter or 
other equipment: he must be lifted and carried by 
hand, by one or more bearers. In selecting a manual 
method of transporting a patient two factors must 
be considered: (a) The nature of the disability and 
the care necessary to preclude complications likely 
to arise as a result of moving the patient; (b) The 
necessity of selecting for use the least awkward and 
tiring method of moving the patient, especially when 
any appreciable distance is involved. 
Transporting a patient without a litter or other 
equipment may be accomplished by one or two bear- 
ers using the methods next described. 
One Bearer. 
7-20. Supporting Carry.—A single bearer may as- 
sist and support a slightly injured man in walking, 
which assistance is designated the “Supporting 
Carry.” The procedure is as follows: (1) The 
bearer turns the patient on his face (fig. 69) and 
steps astride the patient’s body, facing his head 202 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
(fig. 70); (2) The bearer places his hands under 
the patient’s armpits and raises him to his knees 
(fig. 71); (3) The bearer clasps the patient around 
the waist and raises him to his feet (fig. 72); (4) The 
Figure 69.—Supporting carry, first step. 
bearer seizes the patient’s left wrist with his left 
hand and draws the patient’s left arm around the 
bearer’s neck (fig. 73). The patient’s body now rests 
against the right side of the bearer’s body, the latter’s TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
203 
arm being placed around the patient’s waist for 
support (fig. 74); (5) The patient then walks, 
assisted by the bearer. 
Figure 70.—Supporting carry, second step. 
7-21. In Arms Carry.—This method may be used 
to carry an unconscious as well as a conscious pa- 
tient. The procedure is as follows: (1) The patient 
is brought to an upright position by the first three 204 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
steps used in the Supporting Carry (see par. 7-20); 
(2) The bearer turns slightly toward his right (left), 
Figure 71.—Supporting carry, thii'd step. 
brings his right arm upward to a supporting position 
about the patient’s back, and passes his left (right) TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
205 
arm under the patient’s thigh (fig. 75); (3) The 
bearer lifts the patient into position, carrying him 
well up to lessen fatigue (fig. 76). 
Figure 72.—Supporting carry, fourth step. 206 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Figure 73.—Supporting carry, fifth step. TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
207 
Figure 74.—Supporting carry. 208 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Figure 75.—In arms carry, fourth step. TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
209 
Figure 76.—1 n arms carry. 210 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Figure 77.—Pickaback carry, fourth step. TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
211 
7-22. Pickaback Carry.—This method Is one of 
the easiest ways of transporting a patient by one 
bearer, but requires the cooperation of the patient. 
The procedure is as follows: (1) The patient is 
brought to an upright position by the first three 
steps used in the Supporting Carry (see par. 7-20); 
(2) The bearer maintains a pull on the patient’s 
arm (fig. 77) and steps in front of the patient. 
Then, with his back to him, the bearer stoops and 
raises the patient upon his back (fig. 78). The 
patient having encircled the bearer’s neck with his 
arms, the bearer grasps the patient’s thighs (fig. 
79); (3) The bearer resumes the upright position, 
at the same time lifting the patient, bringing him 
well up on his back. The patient continues to secure 
himself by grasping the bearer’s neck (fig. 80). 
7-23. Across Back (Fireman’s) Carry.—This is the 
method of preference for transporting an uncon- 
scious patient by a single bearer. The procedure is 
as follows: (1) The patient is brought to an upright 
position by the first three steps used in the Support- 
ing Carry {see par. 7-20); (2) The bearer passes 
around to face the patient’s left, grasps the patient’s 
right wrist with his left hand (fig. 81) and draws 
the arm over his head and down upon his left shoul- 
der (fig. 82) ; (3) The bearer shifts himself in front 
of the patient, stoops and passes his right arm be- 212 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
tween the patient’s legs (fig, 83) and then draws the 
patient over his right shoulder and rises (fig. 84); 
(4) The bearer passes the patient’s right wrist to 
his own right hand, reaches backward with his left 
Figure 78.—Pickaback carry, fifth step. TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
213 
hand and, grasping the patient’s left wrist, draws 
the patient’s left arm forward and around his body 
(fig. 85). 
Figure 79.—Pickaback carry, sixth step. 214 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Figure 80.—Pickaback carry. TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
215. 
Figure 81.—Across-back carry, fourth step. 216 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Figure 82.—Across-back carry, fifth step. TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
217 
Figure 83.—Across-back carry, sixth step. 218 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Figure 84.—Across-back carry, seventh step. TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
219 
Figure 85.—Across-back carry. 220 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
7-24. Tied-Hands Crawl or Carry.—(a) This 
method of transporting a patient by a single bearer 
should be used when enemy observation and result- 
ant fire render other methods impracticable and 
when it appears prudent for the bearer to stay out 
of sight or as close to the ground as possible. The 
procedure is as follows; (1) The bearer lays the 
patient on his back; (2) The bearer places himself 
on his back by the patient’s left side; (3) The bearer 
grasps the patient’s right arm above the elbow from 
its under side with his right hand; (4) The bearer 
grasps the same arm (right) below the elbow, from 
the topside, with his left hand (fig. 86); (5) The 
bearer then, keeping the right side of his body 
slightly upon the patient’s body and entwining his 
legs around the patient’s legs, rolls over to the left 
onto his stomach, pulling the man with him (the 
patient is now lying face down on the bearer’s back 
with his left arm free (fig. 87) and his right arm 
over the bearer’s right shoulder; (6) The bearer, 
after assuming this creeping or crawling position, 
draws the patient’s left arm under his left armpit 
and secures both wrists of the patient together with 
any available material (cloth, bandage, neckerchief, 
handkerchief, etc.); (7) The bearer may then crawl 
with the patient in this position (fig. 88), or, when 
necessary, rise erect and climb ladders or, if it is TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
221 
Figure 86.—Tied-hands crawl or carry, first step. 222 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
desired to carry him pick-a-back, reach behind and 
support his legs. 
(b) The method just described may be varied by 
the bearer first tying the patient’s wrists together 
and then lying down on top of him, inserting his 
head and right Cor left) shoulder through the loop 
formed by the patient’s tied wrists, and then turning 
Figure 87.—Tied-hands crawl or carry, second step. 
so that the patient is in the position described in the 
preceding paragraph. 
(c) Should the patient’s right arm be injured, the 
bearer places himself on his back by the patient’s 
right side and grasps the patient’s left arm instead 
of the right, substituting his right arm or hand where 
the left is indicated in the text, and vice versa. TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
223 
Two Bearers. 
7-25. The Rifle-Overcoat Carry.—A patient may 
be transported by utilizing two rifles and an over- 
coat (see par. 6-4 (b) (1)). The procedure is as 
follows: (1) Turn the overcoat inside out and button 
it, keeping the sleeves inside; (2) With the buttons 
down and beginning at the collar end, insert the 
barrel of a rifle through each sleeve; (3) The front 
bearer rolls the tails of the coat tightly around the 
barrels of the rifles and takes his grasp over them; 
the rear bearer holds by the butts of the rifles, trigger 
guards up. 
Figure 88.—Tied-hands crawl or carry completed. 224 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
A blouse or a jumper may be utilized in the same 
manner as, and in lieu of, an overcoat. 
7-26. The Rifle-Blanket Carry.—Two rifles and 
a blanket may be utilized by two bearers to carry a 
patient (see par. 6-4 (t») (2)). The procedure is as 
follows: (1) Fold a blanket once from side to side 
and lay a rifle transversely upon it across the center 
so that the butt and muzzle project beyond the edges; 
(2) Next fold one end of the blanket upon the other, 
lay a second rifle upon the new center, and fold the 
free ends of the blanket upon the end containing 
the first rifle so as to project a couple of inches 
beyond that edge; (3) The front bearer grasps the 
barrels of the rifles and the rear bearer holds by the 
butts, trigger guards up. 
7-27. Arms and Legs Carry.—This method, em- 
ployed by two bearers, may be used to transport the 
unconscious as well as the conscious patient. The 
procedure is as follows: (1) With the patient on his 
back, the front bearer spreads the patient’s lower 
extremities, steps between them facing the patient’s 
feet, kneels, and grasps the patient’s thighs with his 
arms (fig. 89); (2) At the same time the rear bearer 
kneels at the patient’s head facing the patient, 
thrusts his arms beneath the patient’s shoulders, and 
brings his forearms inside the patient’s arms, up- 
ward and across the patient’s chest, interlocking his TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
225 
hands (fig. 90); (3) Bearers rise simultaneously, 
lifting the patient into a semirecumbent position 
(fig. 91). 
7-28. Pour-hand Grasp Carry.—This method may 
Figure 89.—Arms and legs carry, first step. 
be used by two bearers to transport a conscious pa- 
tient. The procedure is as follows: (1) The bearers 226 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
face each other, each grasping his left wrist with his 
own right hand (fig. 92); (2) A seat is then made of 
the four hands by each bearer grasping the other’s 
right wrist with his own free left hand (fig. 93); (3) 
Figure 90.—Arms and legs carry, action of rear bearer. 
On this improvised seat the patient sits, supporting 
himself by placing an arm around the neck of each 
bearer (figs. 94 and 95). TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
227 
7-29. In Arms Carry.—This method may be used 
by two bearers to transport a conscious or uncon- 
Figxjre 91.—Arms and legs carry completed. 
scious patient for a limited distance, or when loading 
on some mechanical carrier. The procedure is as 228 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Figure 92.—Pour-hand grasp carry, first step. TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
229 
follows: (1) With the patient lying on his back, the 
bearers kneel on one knee on the same side of the 
patient; one bearer then places one arm beneath the 
patient’s shoulders (the partially bent elbow sup- 
Figuee 93.—Four-hand grasp carry, second step. 
porting the head and neck) and the other arm be- 
neath the patient’s back at about the lower rib 
margins, while the other bearer places his arms be- 230 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Figure 94.—Four-hand grasp carry, placing patient in 
position. TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
231 
Figure 95.—Four-hand grasp carry, patient being carried. 232 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
neath the patient’s hips and knees, respectively (fig. 
96) ; (2) Bearers lift patient to their knees (fig. 
97) ; (3) The bearers rise simultaneously, lifting the 
patient in a horizontal position, his weight being 
carried well up (fig. 98). 
Figure 96.—In arms carry, beginning (2 bearers). 
7-30. Supporting Carry.—This method may be 
used by two bearers, one on each side, to assist a 
slightly injured patient in walking. The procedure 
is similar to that described for one bearer in para- 
graph 7-20. TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
233 
On Horseback. 
7-31. A patient who is able to help himself to some 
extent may be transported by horseback. The pro- 
cedure is as follows: (1) The horse, blindfolded if 
Figure 97.—In arms carry, second step. 
necessary, is held by an attendant. (2) Sufficient 
help, depending upon the location and nature of the 
injury, is rendered to mount the patient. (3) Once 
mounted, the patient is made as comfortable as pos- 234 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
sible. A comrade may be mounted behind the pa- 
tient to assist him and to guide the horse; otherwise, 
a lean-back may be provided, made of a blanket roll, 
a pillow, or a bag filled with leaves or grass. If the 
Figure 98.—In arms carry, completed. TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
235 
patient is very weak, the lean-back may be made of a 
sapling bent into an arch over the cantle of the 
saddle, its ends securely fastened. 
Drill. 
7-32. General.—(a) Drill in the transportation 
of patients without litters is only for the purpose 
of providing the instruction and exercise necessary 
to develop uniformity in applying the proper 
methods and procedures concerned therewith. To 
facilitate this instruction and exercise certain com- 
mands should be used but their use in actual oper- 
ations is not contemplated. The preparatory com- 
mands appear in the text in small capital letters 
and the commands of execution in large capital 
letters. 
(b) Formation.—1. For instruction in handling 
the patient by one bearer the unit (squad, platoon, 
or company) should be formed in two ranks, facing 
each other. After each rank has counted off, men 
with the same number form teams, the two ranks 
alternating as bearer and patient as directed by the 
instructor. 
2. For instruction in handling the patient by two 
bearers the units should be formed in single rank 
and then divided into groups of threes. The in- 
dividual members of each group alternate as No. 1 236 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
bearer, No. 2 bearer, and patient, as directed by the 
instructor, the No. 1 bearer being in charge of the 
group. 
7-33. To Carry Patient by One Bearer (see pars. 
7-20, 7-21, 7-22, 7-23, 7-24, and 7-25).—Only one set 
of commands, varied to meet the requirements of 
the method used, is necessary for this instruction. 
(a) To place hearer in position.—The patient be- 
ing prone, to place the bearer in position, the com- 
mands are: 1. right (left) side, 2. POST. The 
preparatory command will vary with the patient’s 
disability. If there be no choice, the command will 
be left side, thus enabling the bearer to work from 
his right. At the command POST, the bearer moves 
by the nearest route and takes an erect position by 
the patient’s right (left) hip, facing the patient. 
(b) To lift patient.—The bearer being in position, 
to lift the patient to the carry, the commands are: 
1. by supporting carry (or other type carry de- 
sired) ,2. lift, 3. PATIENT. At the first command, 
the bearer stands fast. A short pause after this 
command enables the bearer to mentally review the 
actions he will take. At the second command, the 
bearer proceeds to bring the patient to an erect 
position, (see par. 7-20). At the command PATIENT, 
the bearer lifts the patient to the position indicated 
by the first command. TRANSPORTATION OF SICK AND INJURED 
237 
7-34. To Carry Patient by Two Bearers (see 
pars. 7-26, 7-27, 7-28, 7-29, and 7-30).—(a) To 
place bearers in position.—As in the case of the one- 
bearer carries, to place bearers in position, the same 
commands, varied to meet the desired method of 
carry, are prescribed. These commands are as fol- 
lows: 1. Arms and legs carry.—To place bearers in 
position for the Arms and Legs Carry, the commands 
are: 1. head and feet, 2. POSTS. At the command 
POSTS, bearers take position as follows: No. 1 be- 
tween the patient’s legs, No. 2 at the patient’s head, 
both facing the patient’s feet. 
2. In arms carry.—To place bearers in position for 
the In Arms Carry, the commands are: 1. right 
(left) side, 2. POSTS. At the command POSTS, 
bearers take position on the right (left) side of the 
patient, No. 1 opposite and facing the patient’s hip, 
No. 2, the patient’s shoulder. 
3. Supporting carry.—To place bearers in posi- 
tion for the Supporting Carry, the commands are: 
1. both sides, 2. POSTS. At the command POSTS, 
bearers proceed by the most direct route to the pa- 
tient and take erect positions facing the patient, 
No. 1 opposite the patient’s right hip, and No. 2 
opposite the patient’s left hip. 
(b) To lift patient.—The bearers being in posi- 
tion to lift patient, the commands are: 1. by arms 238 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
and legs carry (or other type carry desired), 2. lift, 
3. PATIENT. At the second command, bearers place 
themselves and the patient in the necessary posi- 
tion for lifting. At the command PATIENT, bearers 
lift patient to the position designated in the first 
command. 
7-35. To Lower Patient.—Whether one or two 
bearers are being utilized, to lower patient, the 
commands are: 1. lower, 2. PATIENT. At the com- 
mand PATIENT, the patient is carefully lowered to 
a prone position by a reversal of the steps by which 
he was originally lifted, when the bearer or bearers 
resume posts assumed prior to lifting the patient. CHAPTER VIII 
LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
Section I.—THE LANDING FORCE 
8-1. General.—(a) The term landing force is 
used when the force to be landed is composed of offi- 
cers, men, and equipment drawn from the crews and 
material of naval vessels. Such a force may be 
landed for drill, ceremonies, parades, civilian disas- 
ter relief, or to guard embassies or United States cit- 
izens in foreign ports. In time of war it may be 
landed to seize, occupy, and defend military objec- 
tives. 
(b) A permanently organized landing force com- 
prised of rifle, machine gun, 37-mm. gun, 81-mm. 
mortar, artillery, and other units as prescribed by 
the force or fleet commander, is maintained by each 
ship that has landing-force equipment, each division, 
each force, and each fleet. The organization of the 
landing force, whether ship, division, force, or fleet, 
is flexible so that all or any part of the landing force 
may be landed as required by the nature of the task 
to be performed. 
(c) The ship’s landing force varies in size and 
composition according to the type of ship, that for 
239 240 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
a ship of the first rate normally consisting of a bat- 
talion, or infantry battalion as it is commonly called. 
Except under extraordinary circumstances and when 
specifically directed by the senior officer present, not 
more than one-half of the combatant complement 
of a ship is landed at any one time. Enough men are 
always left on board to care for the ship, to use the 
battery, and to move the engines as may be required 
by the existing conditions of weather or service. A 
small ship which cannot furnish a battalion organ- 
izes its landing force so that a battalion can be 
formed by combining its forces with those of adja- 
cent ships. 
(d) A landing-force battalion is so organized as to 
include all command, administrative, and supply 
functions required for its employment as a combat 
unit. At normal strength an infantry battalion com- 
prises three rifle companies, one machine-gun and 
special weapons company, and one headquarters 
company. 
(e) The headquarters company of a battalion fur- 
nishes the personnel and equipment necessary to the 
battalion commander for the execution of his com- 
mand and administrative functions and such other 
personnel as will enable the battalion to be self- 
contained. One of the subdivisions of the battalion 
headquarters company is the medical section. LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
241 
(/) The medical section of a landing-force bat- 
talion is commanded by the battalion surgeon who 
is a member of the battalion staff. The battalion 
medical section consists of 8 hospital corpsmen, 1 for 
each company (known as company-aid men), and 4 
at the battalion dressing station or small hospital, 
and litter bearers who are assigned from the various 
companies as required, usually 2 for each 100 com- 
batants. The band section, comprised of 20 enlisted 
men, is available for service as litter bearers with 
the medical section. 
(g) If considered necessary for the contemplated 
operations, a company organized for independent 
missions, or a ship’s landing force of the size of a 
company, may have included in its administration 
and supply group a medical section consisting of one 
medical officer, one hospital corpsman, and litter 
bearers assigned from company personnel as re- 
quired. Platoons organized for independent mis- 
sions, or a ship’s landing force of the size of a pla- 
toon may have included in the organization a med- 
ical group consisting of a medical officer or hospital 
corpsman and litter bearers from platoon personnel 
as required. In the event a ship’s landing force of the 
size of a platoon is combined with the landing-force 
detachments from other ships to form a company, 242 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
the medical groups may be assigned to the company 
headquarters. 
(h) Landing-force battalions from several ships 
may be combined to form an infantry regiment 
which, at normal strength, is comprised of a head- 
quarters company, a service company, and two 
or more battalions, usually three. 
(i) The organization, formation, functions, etc., 
of the regimental headquarters company are, in 
general, similar to those of the battalion head- 
quarters company and one of its subdivisions is the 
medical platoon. 
(j) The medical platoon, as the medical section of 
an infantry regiment is designated, consists of 2 
medical officers, 20 hospital corpsmen, and the neces- 
sary litter bearers, and establishes a regimental 
medical headquarters and a small hospital. The regi- 
mental surgeon, a member of the regimental staff, is 
in command of the medical platoon. 
(k) A landing-force brigade normally comprises 
a brigade headquarters, special troops, two infan- 
try regiments, an engineer battalion, and a medical 
battalion. When artillery and aviation are added, 
the organization is termed a reinforced brigade. 
(l) A medical battalion is composed of a head- 
quarters company, a service company, a collecting 
company, an ambulance company, and two hospital LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
•243 
companies. The brigade surgeon, a member of the 
brigade staff, is in command of the medical battalion. 
Organization. 
8-2. General.—(a) Whatever the plan or organi- 
zation adopted for the various landing forces, it is 
important that it be made as nearly permanent as 
possible, complete in all its details, and that units be 
definitely assigned, in order that all concerned may 
become familiar with their duties before the time 
when the landing force may be required. This is 
especially true of the detail of the commanders and 
of staff officers for all organizations. Systematic 
instruction and drill therefore must be given the dif- 
ferent units comprising the force and as the oppor- 
tunities for drill and exercise on shore are neces- 
sarily limited much of such training must be done on 
board ship. It usually consists of lectures, practical 
demonstrations, and such exercises as the available 
space on board ship will permit. 
(b) A military organization consists of a com- 
mand element, combat elements, and service ele- 
ments. The command element consists of a single 
head or commander, together with such assistants 
or staff officers as are necessary to relieve him of the 
burden of details and enable him to exercise ade- 
quate control over his command. 244 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
The commander of any unit is alone responsible 
to his superior for all the unit does or fails to do. 
All policies, basic decisions, and plans must be au- 
thorized by the commander before they are put into 
effect. All orders from a higher unit to a subordi- 
nate unit are given to the commander thereof, and 
each individual is accustomed to look to his imme- 
diate superior for orders and instructions. By this 
means alone, authority and responsibility are defi- 
nitely fixed and the channels of command definitely 
established. 
(c) The staff is an aid to command. It is pro- 
vided to relieve the commander of details by: (1) 
Providing basic information and technical advice by 
which he may arrive at decisions; (2) Developing 
the basic decision into adequate plans, translating 
plans into orders, and transmitting them to sub- 
ordinate leaders; (3) Insuring compliance of these 
orders by constructive inspection and observation 
for the commander; (4) Keeping the commander in- 
formed of everything he ought to know; (5) Antici- 
pating future needs and drafting tentative plans to 
meet them; and (6) Supplementing the command- 
er’s efforts to secure unity of action throughout the 
command. 
(d) The sole purpose of the staff is to assist the 
commander to accomplish his mission, and the acme LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
245 
of staff service is reached when, under the direction 
of the commander, and with the minimum of friction, 
discomfort, misunderstandings, and loss for the units 
of the command, that mission is achieved. Team- 
work is essential to efficient staff functioning, and 
cooperation not only works downward but upward 
and laterally as well. 
(e) All military units larger than a company have 
headquarters and staffs whose duties are both tacti- 
cal and administrative. The battalion is the small- 
est unit which has a staff, although even in the com- 
pany there are officers and petty officers who have 
duties that parallel those of the staff officers. 
(/) Brigade and regimental commanders are desig- 
nated by the fleet or force or division commanders, 
and staff officers are similarly designated usually, as 
far as practicable, on the recommendation of their 
respective chiefs. The senior medical officers in a 
landing force are known as brigade, regimental, and 
battalion surgeons. They are members of the staffs 
of the units to which they are attached, and they 
serve as their titles indicate. Responsibility for the 
medical service of a landing force is vested in the 
senior medical officer attached to the largest tactical 
unit of the force and the normal chain of medical 
responsibility is, in descending order: Brigade sur- 
geon, regimental surgeon, and battalion surgeon. 246 
8-3. Staff Surgeons.—(a) In general, a medical 
officer serving on the staff of any landing-force unit: 
(1) Exercises supervision over all medical-depart- 
ment activities of the unit, including instruction of 
medical-department personnel: (2) Is charged, under 
the direction of the commander of the unit, with the 
command of such personnel as are attached to or 
serving with the medical department of the unit; 
(3) Furnishes the commander of the unit with in- 
formation and advice on all questions affecting the 
medical department; (4) Submits to the commander 
of the unit such recommendations and requests as 
he may deem advisable as to training, instruction, 
and utilization of personnel other than medical de- 
partment to promote the medical welfare of the unit; 
(5) Initiates and supervises measures for the care, 
treatment, and evacuation of the sick and wounded 
of the unit; (6) Institutes measures to insure the 
keeping of the required records and the making of 
the required reports by the medical-department per- 
sonnel of the unit; (7) Supervises the dental serv- 
ices for the unit; (8) Recommends to the unit com- 
mander measures for the prevention and control of 
disease in the unit: (9) Recommends to the unit 
commander visits of inspection by himself or his 
assistants to such places, within the territorial limits 
of the command, as may be necessary for the purpose 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
247 
of inspecting medical-department personnel, equip- 
ment, and administration, and of investigating con- 
ditions affecting the health of military personnel; 
and (10) Performs such other duties as may be 
properly prescribed by superior authority. 
(b) The regimental surgeon, when not specifically 
designated as such, is the senior of the medical 
officers present with the battalions forming the regi- 
ment. He serves in both an advisory and adminis- 
trative capacity. 
As a member of the staff of the regimental com- 
mander he advises that officer on medical and sani- 
tary matters, all advice given or recommendations 
made to be in accord with the policies of higher 
medical authority. 
He supervises all training of the detachment and 
instructs the entire personnel of the regiment in 
personal hygiene, field sanitation, and first aid. 
He provides for the care and treatment of the sick 
and wounded. 
He establishes and commands a regimental-aid 
station if indicated. 
He makes the sanitary inspections, supervising the 
methods of purification of the water supply, the sani- 
tation of kitchens, the methods of disposal of gar- 
bage and waste water, the sanitation of latrines and 
urinals and the filling in and marking of the same 248 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
when discontinued, the sanitation of bathing places 
and picket lines, measures taken for the destruction 
of flies and mosquitoes, and other sanitary pro- 
cedures and precautions necessary to preserve the 
health of the command. 
He makes timely requisitions for all necessary 
medical and dental supplies and equipment. 
He organizes the medical detachment and plans 
its work so as to insure the accomplishment of its 
mission with the least possible disturbance to the 
arm of service which it serves. Such organization 
of the attached medical troops and such plans as he 
may make for their tactical employment are as 
simple as is consistent with the accomplishment of 
their mission. 
He keeps such records and renders such reports 
and returns as may be required. 
The assistant regimental surgeon is an officer 
of the Medical Corps, usually of the rank of lieu- 
tenant or lieutenant, junior grade. In general, his 
duties are such as may be assigned to him from 
time to time by the regimental surgeon. He acts for 
and in the name of the regimental surgeon during 
that officer’s absence from the command. He may 
be detailed to supervise the preparation of reports 
and returns, the preparation of requisitions for sup- 
plies, and the issue of such supplies to sections of the LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
249 
medical detachment. He may also be placed in 
chaige of the regimental dispensary and of the regi- 
mental aid station when one is established. Under 
the supervision of the surgeon, he may be detailed 
to hold sick call and conduct the training of the 
personnel of the headquarters regimental medical 
detachment. 
(c) The battalion surgeon is the senior medical 
officer assigned to duty with a battalion and usually 
is of the rank of lieutenant. In general, his duties 
within the battalion are analogous to the duties of 
the regimental surgeon within the regiment. 
The assistant battalion sukgeon is a commissioned 
officer of the Medical Corps assigned to duty with 
the battalion. In general, the assistant battalion 
surgeon’s duties in the battalion are analogous to 
the duties of the assistant regimental surgeon in 
the regiment. During combat he treats or super- 
vises the treatment of casualties within the battalion 
aid station. 
(d) When dental officers are assigned to the med. 
ical detachment they are subordinate to the senior 
medical officer of the detachment to which they 
are attached and are under his immediate com- 
mand. Dental officers are usually included in the 
regimental medical headquarters and assigned to 
duty with separate battalions of the regiment by 250 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
the regimental surgeon whenever he considers such 
assignment necessary. Under the direction and 
supervision of the regimental surgeon, they are re- 
sponsible for the dental care of the command. This 
includes the instruction of the entire personnel of 
the regiment in oral hygiene, the making of oral in- 
spections to determine whether or not the command 
is practicing oral hygiene, the making of dental sur- 
veys to determine the amount and character of 
dental work to be done, and the accomplishment of 
this work in order of importance to the command 
and to the individual. They establish and operate 
the dental service of dispensaries and during combat 
assist the regimental or battalion surgeons, as the 
situation requires. They are responsible for the 
diagnosis, care, and treatment of dental injuries 
received in combat. They keep dental records and 
render dental reports and returns as required. 
The medical detachment. 
8-4. General.—(a) Whenever the medical detach- 
ment is acting as a unit of the size of a company 
or larger it carries the white flag bearing a red 
cross commonly known as the red-cross or Geneva- 
Cross flag, and when acting independently it also 
carries the national flag. Ordinarily all medical 
officers, hospital corpsmen, litter bearers, and others LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
251 
serving with the medical detachment wear a red- 
cross brassard (an arm badge of white bearing a red 
cross) on the left arm and carry no arms. Against 
a savage or uncivilized enemy or one which does not 
comply with the “Rules of Land Warfare,” however, 
it may be necessary to arm tnem, in which case they 
carry a pistol and omit the brassard. 
(b) In an actual engagement hospital corpsmen 
will be so busily engaged in the dressing of wounds 
and in other work pertaining to their rating that 
it not only will be impracticable but disastrous to 
attempt to employ them in any other capacity. To 
assign hospital corsmen as litter bearers tends to 
weaken the entire medical organization, destroy its 
morale, and ruin its efficiency. Litter bearers there- 
fore should invariably be furnished from the various 
companies and should be men who have had special 
instruction in first-aid procedures and transporta- 
tion of the wounded. During an engagement, in 
order to reduce the number of ineffectives in the 
landing force to a minimum, messmen, orderlies, and 
others not actually engaged in their regular duties 
should, when practicable, be employed to augment 
and reinforce the regular litter bearers. This addi- 
tional personnel should assist in the transportation 
of the wounded and perform such other duties as 252 
may be directed by the battalion or other surgeon, 
and when so serving should lay aside its arms and 
wear red-cross brassards. 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
8-5. Clothing and Individual Equipment.— (a) 
The UNIFORMS, CLOTHING, AND INDIVIDUAL EQUIPMENT 
to be worn or carried by the personnel of a landing 
force will depend upon the nature of the task of the 
landing force, the climatic conditions to be expected, 
and the baggage space available, the requirements 
ordinarily being promulgated by the organization 
commander prior to departure. Normally the medi- 
cal-detachment personnel carries the same articles, 
except arms, as prescribed for line personnel and, 
under certain conditions previously mentioned, may 
be armed. 
(b) The equipment for officers includes such of 
the following articles as are required: (1) Automatic 
pistol, .45 caliber with 3 magazines, holster, lanyard, 
and 21 rounds of ammunition; (2) Pistol belt, with 
suspenders and magazine carrier: (3) First-aid pack- 
age, with pouch; (4) Canteen with cover and cap; 
(5) Haversack, with mess gear (knife, fork, spoon, 
meat can, meat-can cover); (6) Field glasses; (7) 
Whistle: (8) Poncho; (9) Flashlight, electric; (10) 
Wrist watch, with luminous dial; (11) Compass, with 
luminous dial; (12) Despatch case, message book, 
note book, black, blue, green, and red pencils; (13) LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
253 
Clothing roll; (14) Bedding roll; (15) Trunk, locker 
(two for lieutenant commanders and above); (16) 
Identification tags, when prescribed: (17) Gas mask, 
when prescribed: and (18) Steel helmet, when pre- 
scribed. 
When extended operations are contemplated 
ashore where it is impracticable to carry officers’ 
bedding and clothing rolls, a blanket roll may be 
made by rolling the blanket (or blanket and poncho) 
lengthwise, with extra clothing and toilet articles 
inside, securing it with tie-ties. The roll is placed 
over the right shoulder, with both ends of the roll 
secured together under the left arm. 
Only such clothing as is absolutely necessary 
should be carried, but a change of underclothing, 
two pairs of socks, one towel, a blanket, and an extra 
pair of shoes should be included. 
(c) The EQUIPMENT AND CLOTHING FOR MEN in light 
marching order normally includes one of each of the 
following articles: Belt, pistol, web (without mag- 
azine carrier); can, meat; canteen, cover and cup; 
cap, white, watch (sailor’s), or garrison (marine’s); 
carrier, pack, haversack; fork, haversack (carried in 
meat can pouch); haversack; helmet, steel (when 
issued); kit, toilet (with tooth brush, razor, comb, 
dentifrice, shaving cream, mirror, soap, soap box, 
towel, sewing kit, extra pair of leggings and shoe 254 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
laces, and, if used, shaving brush, hair brush, matches 
and tobacco); knife, haversack (carried in meat can 
pouch); mask, gas (when issued); overcoat (when 
prescribed by commanding officer); package, first 
aid, with pouch; poncho, rubber; pouch, meat can, 
haversack; ration, cooked (when prescribed by com- 
manding officer; carried in haversack); ration, re- 
serve (when issued; carried in haversack); socks, 
pair, carried in haversack); spoon, haversack (car- 
ried in meat can pouch); and tag, identification, with 
tape. In heavy marching order one each of the fol- 
lowing articles, unless otherwise noted, is carried in 
the roll in addition to those in the preceding list: 
Blanket; drawers; jumper (sailor’s); 5 pins, tent, 
shelter, round; pole, tent, shelter; shoes, pair; shirt, 
cotton or flannel (marine’s); socks, pairs (total, 2 
pairs); tent, shelter, half; trousers; and undershirt. 
Clothing and equipment are carried in the infan- 
try pack, being assembled as prescribed in the para- 
graphs next following with the exception that hospi- 
tal corpsmen use the web pistol belt instead of the 
web cartridge belt and references to the cartridge 
belt should, therefore, be considered as applying to 
the pistol belt. 
(d) TO ASSEMBLE THE HEAVY MARCHING ORDER PACK. 
1. To assemble the pack carrier to the haversack.— LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
255 
a. Spread the haversack on the ground, inside down, 
suspender side up, outer flap to the front. 
b. Place the buttonholed edge of the pack carrier 
under the buttonholed edge of the haversack, bind- 
ing straps of the carrier up, center row of button- 
holes of the carrier resting under the corresponding 
buttonholes of the haversack. The center row of 
the buttonholes of the pack carrier is suited to a roll 
of the over-all length of the bayonet; for a longer 
roll, or when a large package of reserve rations is 
carried, use the upper row of buttonholes; for a 
shorter roll, use the lower row of buttonholes. 
c. Lace the carrier to the haversack by passing the 
ends of the coupling strap down through the cor- 
responding buttonholes of the haversack and carrier 
nearest the center, passing the ends up through the 
next buttonholes and continuing to the right and 
left, to the sides, until they are linked together. 
2. To attach the cartridge belt to the assembled 
pack carrier and haversack.—a. Spread the pack 
carrier and haversack on the ground, inside down, 
suspender side of the haversack up, and place the 
cartridge belt, adjusted to the man, pockets down, 
tops to the front, along the junction of the haversack 
and carrier. 
b. Insert the end hook of rear belt suspender in 
the eyelet in the top center of the adjusting strap of 256 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
the cartridge belt, the end of the hook outside of 
the belt. 
c. Insert hooks of front belt suspender in the top 
eyelets between the first and second or second and 
third pockets (depending on size of man) from the 
male and female fasteners. 
3. To assemble heavy marching order equipment 
with toilet articles, poncho, and, reserve rations.— 
a. Place the assembled pack carrier, haversack, and 
cartridge belt on the ground, suspender side of the 
haversack down, pockets of cartridge belt up, haver- 
sack spread out, outer flap extended to the front, 
pack carrier and inner flap extended to their full 
length to the rear. 
b. The poncho is folded to the width and length of 
the inner flap and laid on the haversack extending 
from the top edge of the inner flap to within about 
one inch of the outer edge of the outer flap. 
c. Toilet articles, one pair of shoe laces, one pair 
of legging laces, and sewing kit are rolled, towel on 
the outside, into a neat roll the width of the outer 
flap and are placed on the poncho at the outer end 
of the haversack, its forward edge even with the 
rear end of the outer flap. A pair of socks is placed 
next to the towel roll so they will be easily accessible 
on the march. A reserve ration, if issued, will be LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
257 
placed on the poncho and haversack in rear of or 
under the rolled towel depending on its size. 
d. The inner flap is folded over and forward of 
the articles named in preceding paragraph and then 
back under them. 
e. The sides of the haversack are folded over the 
sides of the assembled towel, reserve ration, and 
rear end of the poncho; the upper binding strap 
(or the two upper binding straps if the reserve 
ration as carried extends below the middle strap) 
is passed through the loop on the inner flap oppo- 
site its point of attachment to the haversack body 
and is fastened to the tongueless bar buckle on the 
opposite side in such manner that the free end 
tucks inside the haversack, the strap having been 
first pulled tight to make the fastening secure. 
4. To assemble the heavy marching order roll.— 
a. Spread the shelter half with guy rope attached 
on the ground with tie-ties up, triangular end away 
from the man. Lay tie-ties and guy rope across 
shelter half and fold triangular end over toward 
the man, making it a rectangle. 
b. Spread blanket on shelter half, stripes parallel 
to ridge, with name down and end bearing name on 
side of ridge. Fold ends of blanket over so they 
meet in center. This will make a long roll. For a 258 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
short roll, the blanket ends should overlap, the ex- 
treme overlap being 8 Inches. Move blanket so that 
edge rests on ridge, which leaves from 18 to 26 inches 
of tent exposed at bottom of tent, front edge of 
blanket as displayed coinciding with rear edge of 
shelter half. 
c. Standing at the front end of the tent, ridge on 
the right, place the clothing in the following order 
on the left half of the blanket and about one foot 
from the front edge of the tent. One pair of trou- 
sers and one jumper (shirt) side by side, jumper 
(shirt) on the right; on top of the trousers place one 
pair of drawers; on the top of the shirt place one 
undershirt; across the clothing place one pair of 
socks. For the Navy a white cap and watch cap 
are added and form the outer layer. 
d. The width of the clothing will be the width of 
the fold of the blanket. Between the clothing and 
front edge of tent and close to clothing, place one 
pair of shoes, sole of left shoe down, sole of right 
shoe up, toes overlapping, tops of shoes turned back. 
Shelter-tent pole is placed on blanket at other end 
of and close to clothing. Shelter-tent pins are 
placed inside shoes, three in the right shoe and two 
in the left. 
e. Fold end of blanket at front of tent over shoes. 
Then fold right half of blanket over left half, cover- LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
259 
ing clothing. Then take end of blanket farthest 
from clothing and fold it over to the shelter-tent pole. 
Fold bottom edge of tent over blanket, then fold ridge 
over this. Fold over about 1 foot of end of tent 
farthest from clothing to form a pocket. Beginning 
at front edge roll compactly into this pocket. 
5. To assemble the roll to the pack carrier.—a. Lay 
the lower haversack binding strap forward on the 
haversack, place the roll in the pack carrier, and 
grasp the lower suspension rings at the base of the 
pack carrier, one in each hand; place one knee 
against the bottom of the roll; pull the carrier down 
and force the roll up close against the bottom of the 
packed haversack; without removing the knee pass 
the lower pack carrier binding strap over the roll 
and up through the nearer aperture of the tongueless 
bar buckle and down through the farther aperture, 
pull tight and tuck away the free end; pass and 
secure in similar manner the upper pack carrier 
binding strap, and then the remaining binding straps. 
b. Engage the snap hooks on the pack suspenders 
in the lower suspension rings; fold down outer flap 
(and end of poncho); pass the lower haversack bind- 
ing strap under the bottom or middle one of the 
three haversack binding straps, then up through the 
tongueless bar buckle on the inner side of the outer 
flap. 260 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
c. The equipment is now assembled and packed, 
ready to be adjusted to the man. 
6. To discard the roll without removing the equip- 
ment from the body.—Men work in pairs, assisting 
each other. Pull the lower end of the roll away from 
the man. Grasp the coupling strap at its middle and 
withdraw first one side and then the other. Loosen 
those haversack binding straps which are around 
the roll, pull the roll down and remove it. Unsnap 
the pack suspenders from the lower suspension rings 
and snap them into the upper suspension rings on 
the inner flap. Tighten haversack binding straps, if 
loose. When the roll has been removed secure the 
coupling strap by lacing it through the buttonholes 
along the upper edge of the carrier. 
7. To assemble the heavy marching order roll 
without the shelter half.—The roll is assembled in a 
manner similar to that prescribed in par. 8-5 Id) 4, 
with the following modifications: 
a. Spread blanket on the ground, name down, and 
end bearing name on the right. Fold top and bottom 
of the blanket toward each other until they meet in 
the center, or overlap (if short roll is desired.) 
b. Place clothing as described for heavy marching 
order roll (see par. 8-5 (d) 4), on the near side of the 
left flap of the blanket, and about 1 foot from its 
rear edge. Place the shoes as described for heavy LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
261 
marching order roll next to the clothing and on the 
near side of the left flap. Fold near side of the blan- 
ket over the shoes. Fold right half of the blanket 
over the left half. Fold far side of the blanket over 
about 1 foot to form a pocket. Beginning at the 
clothing end of the roll (near side), roll compactly 
into the pocket. 
c. If it is desired to show name of man on outside 
of blanket roll as a means of identification of the 
roll, spread blanket on the ground, name down and 
end bearing name to the front. Lay clothing as de- 
scribed for heavy marching order, except that center 
line of clothing is on center line of blanket. Place 
shoes in rear of clothing. Fold near end of blanket 
over shoes. Fold right side of blanket over clothing. 
Fold left side of blanket on top of right side. Fold 
far end of blanket over about 1 foot to form a 
pocket. Beginning at the clothing end of the roll 
(near end) roll compactly into the pocket. Place 
roll in pack so the name will be exposed and with 
top of letters to right. 
8. To assemble the light marching order pack.— 
a. Attach the cartridge belt to the haversack and 
pack carrier as prescribed in paragraph 8-5 id) 2. 
b. Roll the pack carrier, with binding straps in- 
side, up over lower edge of haversack. Place and 
secure in the haversack: The towel, rolled with one 262 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
pair of socks and toilet articles; the poncho and 
reserve ration, when issued, as prescribed in par. 8-5 
(d) 3, and secure, in addition, the bottom haversack 
binding strap. Fold the outer flap over and secure 
it by means of the lower haversack binding strap and 
the buckle on its under side. Engage the snap hooks 
on the ends of the pack suspenders with the upper 
suspension rings on inner flap. 
9. Equipment and special equipment will be worn 
or carried as prescribed in the following paragraphs: 
a. Canteen cover.—On left hip, attached to pistol 
belt. 
b. Case, despatch.—Suspended on the right side 
by a strap passed over the left shoulder. 
c. Compass.—Carried in breast pocket. 
d. First-aid pouch.—Near left hip, attached to 
pistol belt. 
e. Helmet.—Attached to the haversack by placing 
the strap over the meat-can pouch and then secure 
it by tying it on with a cord (shoe or legging lace). 
When worn, the strap on the helmet is worn around 
the back of the neck. 
/. Brassards.—Worn .on left arm. 
g. Gas mask.—Worn under the left arm and over 
all other equipment, suspended by a strap passed 
over the right shoulder. LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
263 
h. Glasses, field.—On the left side, suspended from 
the belt or by a strap passed over the right shoulder. 
i. Haversack, officers’ type, with strap.—Worn by 
officers, suspended on the left side by a strap over the 
right shoulder. 
j. Haversack, officers’ type.—Worn by chief petty 
officers and petty officers suspended from pistol belt 
in front of canteen. 
k. Pistol and holster.—On the right hip when pre- 
scribed. 
I. Whistle.—Carried in left breast pocket. Ap- 
propriate adjustments in placing or wearing of 
equipment on belt will be made to suit the measure 
of waist or conformation of the individual. 
(e) INSPECTION OF PERSONAL FIELD EQUIPMENT WHILE 
in ranks.—When equipment is to be inspected in 
ranks the commander causes his unit to prepare for 
inspection as prescribed in paragraph 5-44 and the 
inspection is conducted as described in the para- 
graphs next following. 
1. The company forms in column of platoons (with 
leach platoon in line) by forming extended mass 
formation to the right at 24 paces (par. 5-41) and 
then executing left face. The company commander 
directs the platoon leader to prepare for inspection 
of equipment. If litters are being carried the com- 
mand 1. lower, 2. LITTERS is given. The platoon 264 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
leader provides the additional distance necessary for 
the display of equipment between the opened ranks 
by the commands; 1. front rank, three paces for- 
ward, 2. MARCH; 1. second rank, two paces forward, 
2. MARCH; 1. third rank, one pace forward, 
2. MARCH. He then causes the platoon to take 
interval. Intervals having been taken, the platoon 
leader commands: 1. unsling equipment, 2. DIS- 
PLAY EQUIPMENT. 
2. At the command unsling equipment, each man 
unslings his equipment and places it on the ground 
at his feet, haversack up and to the front, end of 
the pack in front of and touching his toes. 
3. At the command DISPLAY EQUIPMENT, pack 
carriers are unstrapped, rolls removed and unrolled, 
the longer edge of the rolls along the lower edge of 
the pack carriers. 
4. Each man then detaches the pack suspenders 
from lower suspension rings and rolls up pack car- 
rier until coupling strap is exposed and on line with 
upper edge of belt. 
5. Each man unfolds his shelter half and blanket 
so as to expose the contents of roil. 
6. He then places rear end (actual) of shelter half 
with blanket on top and at right, to meet lower 
edge of belt, center line of belt corresponding with 
center line of blanket, carriers which are suspended LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
265 
from belt showing on top of blanket. Guy rope, at- 
tached to shelter half, exposed at left front corner 
of shelter half. 
7. He then removes; Meat can and cover; knife, 
fork, and spoon from meat can pouch, and lays 
outer flap over to front; canteen and canteen cup 
from the canteen cover; first-aid package from first- 
aid pouch; and other special equipment from car- 
riers, pouches, carriers, suspenders, etc., carried or 
worn on belt or haversack not being detached. 
8. He then places clothing and equipment on the 
left half of blanket commencing in the following 
order from the rear: One pair of shoes, left sole 
down, right sole up, right shoe on the right, toes 
overlapping, with tops of both shoes turned back to 
show name; trousers and shirt, side by side, single 
fold to the front, shirt on the right; drawers on top 
of trousers and undershirt on top of shirt, under- 
wear showing single fold to the front; one pair of 
socks across clothing, heel to front, toes to left; 
shelter-tent pins, heads overlapping, three to left, 
two to right; shelter-tent pole, folded with pin to 
right; meat can, with handle closed, hinge to left; 
meat-can cover, ring to left; knife, fork, and spoon, 
handles to left, edge of knife toward fork; first-aid 
package, ring up and to the front (exposing seal); 
canteen cup, to left of center, canteen to right of 266 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
center (concave curves to the right); other equip- 
ment placed as designated. 
9. He then opens haversack and removes articles. 
10. He then makes three folds of the inner flap, 
thus bringing suspension rings in line with upper 
edge of belt (lower third of flap folded inside). 
11. He then places: Folded poncho on inner flap 
with longer edge of poncho on line with lower edge 
of belt, single fold to front; towel, folded to same 
dimensions, on top of poncho; toilet articles on 
towel; one pair of socks on haversack, in front of 
poncho, heels to the front, toes to left; extra pair 
of legging laces and shoe laces on top of and in 
center of socks; sewing kit in center of outer flap. 
12. Brassards are placed on shelter half, opposite 
canteen cap, edge of buckle at left edge of shelter 
half. 
13. The garrison cap, white cap, or watch cap is 
placed in the same position as the helmet, left side 
of cap on top, front of cap towards right. 
14. The case, despatch, is placed in center of 
shelter half, opposite canteen cup, lower edge toward 
inspecting officer, flap open to show pencils and 
message book on flap. 
15. The mask, gas, and carrier is placed on shelter 
half, opposite the helmet, under side down, flap 
open, and to front, mask to front of carrier. LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
267 
16. The unrolled overcoat is placed on left edge of 
shelter half, neck at rear edge. 
17. The reserve ration is placed on front of the 
outer flap of haversack. 
18. Identification tags worn on the body are ex- 
posed for inspection. 
19. Each man then assumes the position of At- 
tention, toes twelve inches from edge of blanket, 
directly in rear of clothing. 
20. The company commander then passes along 
the ranks, inspects the equipment, and directs the 
platoon leader to have packs rolled and the platoon 
assembled. The platoon leader then commands: 
ROLL PACKS. 
21. Each man assembles his equipment and leav- 
ing it in its position on the ground at his feet, re- 
sumes the position of Attention. 
22. All equipment being assembled, the platoon 
leader commands: SLING EQUIPMENT. 
23. Packs are slung and belts fastened. 
24. The platoon leader then causes the platoon 
to assemble and the inspection is completed. 
(/) EXAMINATION OF EQUIPMENT ON THE BUNK. 
When it is desired to inspect the equipment on the 
bunk, the bunk is made down, so that the stenciled 
name on the blanket is exposed along the center of 268 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
the foot edge of the bed. The equipment is then 
laid out as described in the subparagraphs following. 
Note.-—The right side of the bunk is the right side when 
standing at the head of the hunk, facing the foot. 
1. The haversack is placed across the foot of the 
bunk, suspender side down, top even with the foot 
of the bunk, outer flap with meat-can pouch folded 
over and towards the head of the bunk, and pack 
carrier, with pack carrier binding straps inside, 
folded down and under the haversack. Pouches and 
carriers carried or worn on the belt are not detached. 
The cartridge belt,,pack suspenders, and haversack 
binding straps are extended perpendicular to and to 
the edges of the bunk. 
2. The shelter half and poncho are folded to the 
width and length of the inner flap of the haver- 
sack. The shelter half is placed across the belt and 
haversack, single fold towards the foot of the bunk, 
and against the bottom of the meat-can pouch so 
that about 2V2 pockets of the belt are exposed on 
each side. The poncho is placed on top of the shelter 
half, single fold towards the foot of the bunk. 
3. The shelter-tent pins, shelter-tent pole, meat 
can, meat-can cover, knife, fork, spoon, and first- 
aid package are placed on the bunk in the, order 
named from head to foot between the pillow and the LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
269 
haversack, centered along the middle of the bunk, 
and as prescribed in paragraph 8-5 (e) 8. 
4. The canteen and canteen cup are placed on the 
bunk as prescribed in paragraph 8-5 (e) 8. 
5. Articles normally carried in the heavy-march- 
ing order roll are not displayed on the bunk with 
the equipment. 
6. The toilet articles and ration may be displayed 
on top of the poncho. 
7. Special equipment is laid on the right side of 
the bunk as prescribed in paragraphs 8-5 (e) 12, 
13, 14, 15, 16, 17, and 18, inclusive, making allow- 
ance for the restricted space and absence of shelter 
half. 
8. The man stands at Attention at the right side 
of the head of the bunk. 
((/) DISPLAY OF CLOTHING ON BUNK (MARINE CORPS) . 
When it is desired to inspect clothing on the bunk, 
the bunk is made down so that the stenciled name 
on the blanket is exposed along the center of the 
foot edge of the bed. The clothing is then laid out 
as prescribed in the subparagraphs following. 
1. From right to left in the order given the fol- 
lowing articles are arranged on the part of the pil- 
low towards the foot of the bunk: Cap frame, on its 
right side, visor to the right, right side of sweatband 
turned down exposing name; cap, garrison, winter 270 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
service, on its right side, with left lower edge turned 
back exposing the name in center of lining on right 
side: and cap, garrison, summer service, the same as 
cap, garrison, winter service. 
2. From right to left in the order given the fol- 
lowing articles are arranged nearly vertical against 
the bunk head piece: Covers, cap, insides to the front, 
exposing names; and hat, field, on its right side, 
inside to the front, right side of sweat band turned 
down exposing name. 
3. Folded so that, when displayed, the name, 
stenciled as prescribed in Art. 15-25, Marine Corps 
Manual, will be legible from the foot of the bunk, 
the following articles are arranged from the edge 
of the pillow towards the foot of the bunk, each 
article overlapping the one previously listed: On the 
right side of the bunk, shirts, undershirts, scarfs, and 
gloves, cotton and woolen; in the center of the bunk, 
overcoat, coat, dress, coats, service, winter, and 
leggings, with an extra pair of shoe laces, legging 
laces, and marking outfit (stencil, etc.) on top; on 
the left side of the bunk, trousers, dress, trousers, 
service, winter, trousers, service, summer, drawers, 
knee, and socks. 
4. Extended full length across the bunk below the 
articles listed in the preceding paragraph, buckles 
to the right and under side up with name legible LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
271 
from the foot of the bunk, the belt, dress, belt, serv- 
ice, and belt, trousers, woven, are placed in the order 
given. 
5. One pair of shoes, partially laced with ends of 
laces tucked inside of shoes, is displayed in the cen- 
ter of the bunk at the foot, left sole down, right 
sole up, right shoe on the right, toes overlapping, 
and tops of both shoes turned back to expose the 
name. Extra shoes with laces attached and folded 
in are placed under the bunk on the deck, toes to 
the foot and on line with the legs of the foot piece. 
6. Box, clothing, barracks (if issued) is placed at 
the foot of the bunk, lid open, tray partially laid 
back, and contents neatly arranged. All articles 
of clothing are removed therefrom and displayed on 
the bunk. 
7. Locker, steel (if issued) is opened with contents 
neatly arranged. All articles of clothing are re- 
moved therefrom and displayed on the bunk. 
8. Bunk card holder (if issued) is suspended over 
the center of the top rail of the foot piece, with card 
properly filled out with the man’s name, rank, etc. 
9. The man stands at Attention at the right side 
of the bunk at its head. 
8-6. Mission.—Conservation of manpower is the 
mission of the medical detachment with a landing 
force. To accomplish this mission the medical de- 272 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
tachment endeavors to keep as many men physically 
fit for duty as possible, to give prompt and efficient 
treatment to wounded or incapacitated personnel, 
to provide for the collection and rapid evacuation of 
casualties, and to maintain and promote the morale 
of the combat units. As a part of this program in- 
struction in first aid and sanitation is given as 
thoroughly as possible before a landing is ordered, 
all personnel detailed to participate in the landing 
are carefully examined to eliminate those physically 
unfit, measures for the prevention of disease and 
for sanitation are prepared, and arrangements are 
made for the procurement and distribution of medi- 
cal supplies and equipment. 
When landing, the company-aid men accompany 
their respective line units, and take their own medi- 
cal equipment, the other medical-department per- 
sonnel following. Dividing personnel and equipment 
lessens the possibility of total loss such as might 
occur if all medical-department personnel and 
equipment should be sent ashore in one boat and 
that boat be sunk. Deferring the landing of part 
of the medical detachment also automatically creates 
medical assistance in reserve. Medical field equip- 
ment should be loaded in boats with the unit to 
which it belongs and in inverse order to that required 
on landing. This system, called the last in and first LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
273 
out, insures the immediate availability of the equip- 
ment needed for medical assistance. 
In an actual engagement the important duties 
that medical-department personnel will be called 
upon to perform are: Relief of pain; arrest of hem- 
orrhage: control of shock; immobilization of frac- 
tures; treatment of wounds and burns; and 
evacuation. These duties are performed on the 
firing line, at the dressing stations, and at field or 
other hospitals. 
On the firing line first aid is rendered by com- 
pany-aid men who advance with their company and 
are equipped and prepared to give the treatment 
required and to identify the wounded. The com- 
pany-aid men should carry bandage shears for use 
in cutting away clothing or in making temporary 
dressings from material available, and knives for 
use in the preparation of splints, etc. When called 
upon to render first aid in the area of fire company- 
aid men should move in the proper direction by 
rushes, seeking all available shelter offered by the 
terrain while doing so. 
After the initial first-aid treatment has been given 
casualties are removed to dressing stations at the 
first opportunity, those slightly wounded walking if 
possible, the others being transported. Litter bear- 
ers should not advance on the field under fire as to 274 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
do so is to invite disaster, for they may be killed 
by drawing the enemy’s fire and the wounded sub- 
jected to similar exposure to fire. 
On arrival at the dressing station supplementary 
treatment is given and the slightly wounded directed 
to return to their units. Those requiring evacuation 
should be sorted, tagged, and recorded and sent to 
the collecting station, if there be one, or to the beach 
evacuation station, those unable to walk being car- 
ried thereto by litter bearers. 
In case it becomes necessary to establish a tem- 
porary camp it is the duty of the medical-depart- 
ment personnel to plan and advise in regard to 
necessary sanitary measures affecting the location 
of the camp. Three most Important sanitary prob- 
lems to be settled concern water, food, and the 
disposal of wastes. 
Section 2.—THE EXPEDITIONARY FORCE 
8-7. General.— (a) When the force to be landed 
is composed of personnel and material embarked 
upon a designated mission of protection, occupation, 
or enemy attack outside the continental limits of the 
United States the term expeditionary force is used. 
The Commandant, U. S. Marine Corps, maintains a 
force of marines in a state of readiness for opera- LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
275 
tions with the fleet that may be used to augment 
the size and power of the fleet landing force, as a 
component of an expeditionary force, or as an expe- 
ditionary force in itself. By Navy Department Gen- 
eral Order this force of marines is designated the 
Fleet Marine Force, and it is the duty of medical- 
department personnel with an expeditionary force 
of this type, or on field service as it is commonly 
called, that will be considered in this section. 
(b) The Fleet Marine Force is a highly mobile 
body of troops composed of infantry, artillery, engi- 
neers, and aviation groups available for employment 
as a component unit of the United States Fleet and 
kept in the same state of readiness as other units 
of the fleet. For purposes of training it operates di- 
rectly under the Commander in Chief, U. S. Fleet; it 
accompanies the fleet on the annual fleet problems 
and exercises and constitutes the force which is 
ready at all times to go on expeditionary duty. 
The medical department on field service. 
8-8. Task.—The task of the medical department 
in the field is the conservation of manpower by the 
accomplishment of the following measures; (1) In- 
struction in first aid and sanitation, which should 
be given as thoroughly as possible before taking to 
the field; (2) Prevention of disease; (3) Collection 276 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
and treatment of the sick and wounded and their 
conversion into replacements whenever possible; (4) 
Procurement and distribution of medical supplies 
and equipment. 
8-9. Organization.—(a) The responsibility for the 
medical service of any force is vested in the senior 
medical officer attached to the largest tactical unit 
of the force. The basic large unit of the United 
States Marine Corps is the division. The normal 
chain of medical responsibility in descending order 
is: Force surgeon, division surgeon, regimental sur- 
geon, and battalion surgeon. 
(b) Each tactical organization larger than a com- 
pany has a staff to assist the unit commander. Staff 
service is rendered by a team composed of executive 
staff officers and special staff officers. The surgeon 
belongs to the latter group. The function of the 
executive staff is that of direction, and the function 
of the special staff is that of operation. 
(c) The medical personnel attached to an expedi- 
tionary force, U. S. Marine Corps, is divided into: 
(1) Attached medical troops, namely, medical units 
which are integral parts of combatant organizations 
and are known as company, battalion, and regimen- 
tal medical detachments; and (2) Medical depart- 
ment organizations and supporting hospitals. In 
time of peace if the force landed be of such size that LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
277 
the attached medical troops are insufficient to meet 
the needs of the organization, a supporting hospital 
of suitable type should be landed unless definitive 
treatment is provided aboard a hospital ship or 
other designated naval vessel. 
id) When an expeditionary force is landed in time 
of war, the supporting medical-department organi- 
zation for a division is a medical battalion consisting 
of one headquarters and service company, and medi- 
cal companies in accordance with the Tables of 
Organization, U. S. Marine Corps. Each medical 
company consists of four sections: Headquarters, 
collecting, hospital, and service. The company is 
designed to maintain evacuation from the unit in 
advance, establish one 72-bed hospital or two 36-bed 
hospitals, further evacuate cases in accordance with 
a prescribed plan, and to form a link in the chain 
of medical supply to the front. 
The functions, distribution, and coordination of 
medical companies are the duty of the division sur- 
geon under the division commander. If the force 
be medically independent of sea forces and the hos- 
pital organization of the medical department is 
insufficient, additional supporting hospitals may be 
required. 
8-10. Staff Surgeons.—(a) There is normally a 
staff medical officer for each command larger than 278 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
a company. The purpose of the staff is to assist the 
commander to accomplish his mission. Teamwork 
and cooperation is essential to efficient staff func- 
tioning. Division, regimental, and battalion sur- 
geons serve as their titles indicate. The duties of 
staff surgeons with an expeditionary force are as 
described in par. 8-3 (a). 
(b) The senior medical officer attached to the 
force serves as force surgeon on the staff of the force 
commander and the whole medical department of 
the force is under his control. In addition to the 
general duties of a staff surgeon, the force surgeon 
has general supervision over all medical-department 
activities of the force, and is responsible for the 
sanitation of the occupied area; the collection, evac- 
uation, and hospitalization of all sick and wounded; 
the preparation of reports, records, and returns: the 
procurement, storage, and distribution of medical 
and surgical stores; and the training and coordina- 
tion of all the medical units of the force. He keeps 
himself informed regarding the tactical plan of the 
force, and in the light of that plan estimates the 
medical-department requirements for the operation; 
advises his subordinate medical-department person- 
nel regarding his decision by a clear and concise 
order, plan, or annex to the operation order; main- 
tains liaison with the force medical officer afloat; LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
279 
and requires all unit medical officers to keep a record 
of and report to their commanding officers instances 
of valor or meritorious conduct by their personnel, 
and a daily written record of medical events of 
importance. 
8-11. Company Hospital Corpsmen.—One or more 
hospital corpsmen, designated company-aid men, 
are assigned to each combat company. During 
action they follow their company, give such first- 
aid treatment as is possible, and tag the sick, 
wounded, and dead. In stabilized situations they 
may establish local aid posts, but in open warfare 
and in moving situations this is not practicable. 
Effectives should be treated promptly and returned 
to the front line; other casualties should have first- 
aid dressings applied, hemorrhage controlled, and 
fractures temporarily immobilized. Ambulant non- 
effectives should be directed to proceed towards the 
battalion-aid station. Wounded requiring trans- 
portation should be assembled at a fixed place, pref- 
erably to the rear of the inner flank of the company, 
and this area should be designated by a conspicuous 
marker that can be readily identified by the collect- 
ing party. Company-aid men send information to 
the battalion surgeons by messages carried by litter 
aearers or walking wounded. 280 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
8-12. Litter Squads.—(a) The litter squads form 
a part of the battalion medical detachment, and the 
bearers should be men assigned from other branches 
who have had special instruction in first-aid pro- 
cedures and transportation of the wounded. The 
number of litter bearers should total not less than 2 
for each 100 combatants and the medical and sur- 
gical equipment is prescribed by the battalion sur- 
geon. Two bearers to a litter will ordinarily be 
enough but if the lines of communication are long 
or the terrain is rough and hilly, four will be needed. 
(b) During an engagement, in order to reduce the 
number of noneffectives to a minimum, messmen, 
orderlies, and others who are not actually engaged 
in their regular duties should, when practicable, be 
employed to reinforce the litter men. Litter bearers 
and those assisting them ordinarily wear a red-cross 
brassard (an arm badge of white bearing a red cross) ■ 
on the left arm and carry no arms. Against a savage 
or uncivilized enemy or one which does not comply 
with the “Rules of Land Warfare,” however, it may 
be necessary to arm them, in which case they carry 
a pistol and omit the brassard. 
8-13. Preparation for Field Service.—(a) The 
EQUIPMENT, UNIFORMS, CLOTHING, AND PERSONAL EFFECTS 
to be taken will be governed by the nature of the 
expedition, the climate anticipated, and the baggage 281 
space available. Uniform requirements will ordi- 
narily be promulgated by the organization com- 
mander prior to departure. Naval officers and en- 
listed men serving with an expeditionary force of 
marines may wear the field uniform and insignia 
prescribed, respectively, for officers and men of the 
Marine Corps, except that on the right side of the 
garrison cap, instead of the emblem of the Marine 
Corps, they shall wear a half-size, bronze replica of 
the cap device of a commissioned officer of the Navy. 
Other insignia designation of rank or rating shall be 
in accordance with the regulations applying to the 
Navy working uniform. 
LANDING FORCES AND SKIP BATTLE DRILL 
(b) The individual equipment for officers is pre- 
scribed and issued in accordance with the Equip- 
ment, Supply, and Tonnage Tables of the Marine 
Corps: the baggage of officers is prescribed by the 
Marine Corps Manual; and the accessary equipment 
for officers is governed by the nature of the mission 
of the expeditionary force. 
(c) The INDIVIDUAL MARINE CORPS EQUIPMENT FOR MEN 
of the Hospital Corps is issued by the Marine Corps 
quartermaster at the point of mobilization in accord- 
ance with Marine Corps equipment tables. Their 
individual medical equipment is issued by the medical 
officers. 282 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
(d) The table following shows the items of indi- 
vidual equipment that are issued to medical-depart- 
ment personnel serving with Marine Corps organi- 
zations in the field, in landing forces, or in training 
for such services. 
Medical 
Officer 
Chief 
Petty 
Officer 
Hospital 
Corps- 
men 
Bag, clothing- _ _ . 
1 
Bag, field, canvas, o/d, w/shoulder 
strap 
1 
1 
(Haversack, officer's type, may be 
issued in place of.) 
Belt, pistol, web ... 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
Canteen 
1 
2 
2 
Cover, for 
1 
2 
2 
Cup, for . ... ... .. 
1 
2 
2 
Case, despatch and map . 
1 
I 
3 
3 
I 
Book, memo. _ _ . _ 
1 
Pencils, colored 
Glasses, field . ... ........ 
3 
1 
3 
Haversack 
i 
Can, meat w/cover - . .. 
1 
] 
i 
i 
Fork.. ... 
1 
i 
i 
Knife 
1 
i 
i 
Pouch, meat can 
i 
Spoon. ._ ... . . 
1 
i 
i 
Helmet, steel 
1 
i 
i 
i 
i 
1 
i 
i 
Packet, first aid ... 
1 
i 
T 
1 
i 
1 
1 
i 
1 
Poncho 
1 
i 
1 LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
283 
Medical 
Officer 
Chief 
Petty 
Officer 
Hospital 
Corps- 
men 
Protector, pad, cotton 
1 
Roll, bedding 
1 
1 
Roll, clothing . 
1 
1 
Tag, identification 
2 
2 
2 
Tape, for, yards .. _ 
1 
1 
i 
Tent, shelter, each half, w/i guv line 
2 
1 
i 
Pin, tent, round, for 
10 
5 
5 
Pole, for 
2 
1 
1 
1 
1 
Whistle, officer’s . ... . __ 
1 
Basin, wash, collapsible 
1 
Bucket, collapsible . _ .. 
1 
Cot, field _ .. 
1 
1 
1 
Frame, mosquito-net, col . .. 
1 
1 
1 
Net, mosquito, cot.. 
1 
1 
1 
Net, mosquito, head (when authorized 
by commanding officer) 
1 
1 
1 
1 
(e) clothing.—Naval officers are not issued items 
of clothing. The kind and quantity of Marine Corps 
uniforms required, worn with bronzed naval insignia, 
may be purchased by officers of the Navy after arrival 
at a Marine Corps post. It is usually impracticable 
to wear naval service uniforms in the field. 
Hospital corpsmen transferred to a Marine Corps 
post or organization for expeditionary service, or 
training for expeditionary service are issued the 
following articles of clothing gratuitously: Badges, 
486912°—43 19 284 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
rating, or mark, Hospital Corps (as required); 1 belt, 
trousers, woven; 1 belt, service, with buckle; 1 cap, 
garrison, service, summer; 1 coat, service, winter; 
1 cover, cap, green; 1 cover, cap, khaki; 1 frame, 
cap; 1 hat, field, with head strap; 1 ornament, hat, 
bronze; 2 ornaments, collar, bronze, pair; 1 overcoat 
(when required by climatic conditions); 1 scarf, 
service, cotton; 2 shirts, cotton or flannel; 1 shoes, 
leather, pair, or 1 shoes, field, pair; 2 trousers, service, 
summer: and 1 trousers, service, winter. 
(/) MEDICAL DEPARTMENT SUPPLIES AND EQUIPMENT. 
(1) Ample preparations should be made for the 
proper supply of instruments and dressings and 
other equipment for an expedition in accordance with 
the length and character of the service. An inspec- 
tion should be made to see that the medicines, in- 
struments, etc., are in proper condition. Reference 
should be made to the Supply Catalog, Medical 
Department, U. S. Navy, for the material allowances 
and for itemized contents of the various units. This 
equipment shall be inspected semiannually and 
tagged with the date of inspection. 
(2) The quantity of medical supplies and the type 
of equipment to be furnished each of the medical 
units in combat are subject to variable factors, such 
as available transportation facilities, anticipated LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
285 
number of casualties, possible changes in military 
plans, stabilized or mobile warfare, etc. 
(3) Medical material for each medical unit should 
accompany that unit’s personnel in advance or with- 
drawal. 
(4) Resupply of medical material is by automatic 
property exchange. 
(gf) identification tags.—All officers and men shall 
wear identification tags as prescribed. 
(h) medical records.—When a short engagement 
is anticipated, loose leaves from health records, Form 
F cards, and diagnosis tags ordinarily will be the 
only material needed for keeping medical records. 
Upon return to the base the medical entries are to 
be inserted in the proper health records. When a 
longer engagement is anticipated, such records will 
be provided and kept as the force surgeon directs. 
(i) arms.—Medical-department personnel ordi- 
narily carries no arms but wears a brassard (an arm 
badge of white bearing a red cross) on the left arm. 
Against a savage or uncivilized enemy or one which 
Idoes not comply with the “Rules of Land Warfare,” 
they may carry pistols and omit the brassard. 
Functions of medical units in the field. 
8-14. (a) Plans and Orders.—An operation order 
is the medium by which a commander conveys his 286 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
will to his subordinates for a tactical operation. 
Staff surgeons must comprehend the operation order 
and have an accurate mental or written estimate of 
the situation upon which to base the medical plan or 
order that will be applicable to field organizations. 
(b) General Principles.—l. Medical troops at- 
tached to a combatant unit remain with and serve 
this unit in camp, on the march, or in combat. 
2. All medical arrangements are based upon and 
conform with combat orders and plans. 
3. Contact normally is established and main- 
tained in combat from rear to front. 
4. Military necessities, not humanitarian reasons, 
govern the disposition of casualties. 
5. During action, treatment and return of effec- 
tives to their combat units has priority. 
6. In the execution of collection, evacuation, and 
hospitalization the requirements of the military situ- 
ation are paramount. 
7. Casualties are collected and evacuated in the 
axis of their organization. 
8. Normally a medical unit evacuates casualties 
no farther to the rear than its own station. 
9. A constant sorting and classification of casu- 
alties takes place from the advanced positions to 
the rear. LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
287 
10. No cases are sent farther to the rear than 
their own condition or the military situation 
warrants. 
11. The general movement of the seriously 
wounded is to the rear until they have reached a 
medical establishment or hospital where definitive 
treatment can be undertaken. 
(c) Echelons of Medical Assistance.—The pro- 
fessional attention given casualties is the responsi- 
bility of the personnel of the medical units in the 
field. Such personnel should be thoroughly trained 
in the sorting and treating of casualties and litter 
bearers, particularly, need to be drilled in this work. 
Medical assistance is rendered to the founded as 
follows: 
1. company aid.—Location.—About 100 yards in 
the rear of the firing line if the situation is stable, or 
with the troops if in attack. Personnel.—One or 
more hospital corpsmen termed company-aid men. 
Employment.—ln attack company-aid men admin- 
ister first aid to the wounded where they fall, place 
the wounded in a protected spot, if possible, and con- 
tinue to advance with their company; when the sit- 
uation is stable they serve as dressers in the rear of 
the firing line. Evacuation.—Casualties from com- 
pany aid unable to return to their units are evacuated 
by battalion-aid station personnel from the rear, 288 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
those able to walk doing so, all others being trans- 
ported by litter bearers. 
2. battalion-aid station. Location. Depending 
on the terrain and available shelter, about 300 to 800 
yards in the rear of the firing line in a defiladed area 
near the natural line of drift of wounded to the rear. 
Personnel.—Battalion medical officers, hospital 
corpsmen, and litter bearers. Employment.—Evacu- 
ates casualties from company aid, returns effectives 
to their combat units, treats and records casualties. 
Evacuation from this point of medical assistance is 
by personnel attached to the collecting station. 
3. REGIMENTAL MEDICAL HEADQUARTERS. Location. 
In the rear of the battalion-aid stations. Person- 
nel.—Ordinarily the regimental and assistant regi- 
mental surgeons, hospital corpsmen, and litter bear- 
ers. Employment.—Maintenance of contact with 
battalion-aid stations, furnishing of medical supplies 
to the battalions, preparing of reports and returns, 
coordination of evacuation of wounded and sick 
from and sanitation of the regimental area. When 
a regiment is acting independently the regimental 
medical headquarters becomes the echelon of medi- 
cal assistance termed the regimental-aid station. 
4. collecting station.—Location.—Depending on 
the terrain and available shelter, and avoiding sensi- 
tive points, usually about 300 to 1,200 yards in the LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
289 
rear of the battalion-aid stations, at or near the 
natural line of drift of wounded to the rear. Per- 
sonnel.—The collecting section of a medical company 
composed of a liaison group, a collecting-station 
group, a litter-bearer group, and additional litter 
bearers assigned to this duty, as needed, from other 
units. Employment.—The liaison group maintains 
contact with forward medical units. The collecting- 
station group establishes a collecting station at a 
point giving protection from enemy fire and as near 
the battalion-aid stations as possible where it sorts 
the wounded, reapplies dressings if necessary, treats 
shock, and gives other necessary treatment, records 
and verifies diagnosis tags, and serves hot foods and 
drinks. The litter-bearer group brings in the 
wounded from the battalion-aid stations and, with 
other litters and blankets, goes out for additional 
wounded. Evacuation from the collecting station is 
by ambulances from the ambulance station. 
On the march, when not in the presence of the 
enemy, temporary collecting stations are established 
along the route to provide temporary shelter for men 
falling out from illness or injury. These stations are 
evacuated by the ambulances following the troops 
and the casualties carried to the camp hospital 
station. 
5. ambulance station. Location. Ordinarily 
about midway between the collecting station and the 290 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
advanced-hospital station, on firm ground, and in a 
sheltered area. Employment.—As a control point 
from which ambulances are sent forward to carry 
nonwalking wounded from the collecting station to 
the advanced-hospital station and then return to 
the ambulance station with litters and blankets 
furnished in exchange for those in use by the 
wounded. When loaded ambulances pass the am- 
bulance station on their way to the rear a regulating 
officer there sends others forward to replace them. 
Ambulances also are used to evacuate nonwalking 
wounded from the advanced-hospital station to the 
rear. When conditions permit, they may be sent out 
to carry wounded from the battalion-aid stations 
to the collecting station. 
6. advanced-hospital station.—Location.—About 
4 to 6 miles from the front, in a protected area on 
or near a good road on the route of evacuation from 
the front to the rear. Personnel.—One platoon of a 
medical company, one medical company, or two 
medical companies, depending on the situation. 
Employment.—A relatively lightly equipped hospital, 
capable of free movement in the field, in which all 
sick, injured, or wounded received are recorded, 
sorted, grouped, and properly cared for. Wounds 
are cleaned and redressed and emergency surgical 
operations to save life and to control serious LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
291 
hemorrhage are performed when necessary. Ex- 
cept in special situations the advanced-hospital 
station acts as a clearing station and a relay in the 
evacuation system rather than a hospital, and to be 
fully effective must be capable of quickly evacuat- 
ing all wounded so that it can advance as an active 
part of the field force. 
The advanced-hospital station may become a rear- 
hospital station by a rear-hospital station advancing 
and taking over the functions of the advanced- 
hospital station. Evacuation is to the rear by ambu- 
lance as safely and as rapidly as the condition of the 
patient and the situation permit. 
7. rear-hospital station.—Location.—At a suf- 
ficient distance in the rear of the advanced-hospital 
station to permit its functioning (1) as a stationary 
hospital for definitive treatment of evacuated 
wounded if the situation permits, or (2) to advance 
beyond and take over the duties of the advanced- 
hospital station. Personnel.—Normally comprised 
of the second medical company. Employment.—As 
a stationary hospital in the rear for the definitive 
treatment of cases evacuated from the advanced- 
hospital station when the operations are stabilized 
and farther advance is not likely. But if the ad- 
vance is in progress, this station advances beyond 
the advanced-hospital station and assumes its func- 292 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
tion, the former advanced-station hospital in turn 
becoming the rear-hospital station. Such “leap- 
frog” advance continues throughout the period of 
mobility of the operating forces. Evacuation is to 
the base or field hospital, if either one has been 
established, or to a hospital ship or other suitable 
vessel designated to provide definitive treatment. 
8. ADDITIONAL HOSPITAL ASSISTANCE.—Should hos- 
pital support be required in addition to that provided 
by the hospitals established by the medical com- 
panies, and in the absence of a hospital ship or 
other vessel designated to provide definitive treat- 
ment, a field hospital adequately manned and sup- 
plied to meet the requirements of the forces landed 
is established. 
9. All aid stations, hospital stations, and dressing 
points should be properly designated by a red-cross 
flag by day and a green light at night unless orders 
to the contrary are issued. 
Section 3.—SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
8-15. Battle is the final objective of navy units and 
in the organization of a ship primary consideration 
is given to preparation for efficiency in battle. To 
attain battle efficiency it is necessary that the mem- 
GENERAL LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
293 
bers of the crew of a ship be trained in the duties 
they must perform in battle. They first must be 
trained until they become expert in their duties as 
individuals, and next they must be trained in co- 
operation and team work with the others in their 
organized group until the group becomes a smoothly 
functioning one, ready for battle. 
To provide for such training and to develop pro- 
ficiency in the performance of their duties, exercises, 
drills, and instruction for the personnel of a ship are 
regularly held. With such activities, exercises, and 
drills the medical department is concerned for it is 
necessary that it “shall be at all times prepared for 
emergencies, especially during drills, fueling ship, and 
other evolutions,” and “it is important that personnel 
of the medical department be immediately available 
for aseptic work.” 
The most important of the drills carried on by a 
ship concerns the preparation of the ship for battle 
and is known as Battle Exercises. These exercises 
demonstrate the effectiveness of the ship’s battle or- 
ganization, and are held for the purpose of making 
that organization fully effective. They are not to 
be regarded as periods of training for the reason that 
gun crews and other units are expected to be expert 
before the ship goes into action through having been 
brought to thorough proficiency by training at other 294 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
times. The discussion of battle exercises that fol- 
lows will consider: (a) Clear Ship; (£>) Conditions 
of Readiness for Action; (c) General Quarters; and 
(cZ) Gas Defense. 
“Clear Ship” is an evolution in which the ship is 
cleared for battle by the removal of all material that 
is not essential to the fighting of the ship and which, 
if left on board, might be the cause of fire and cas- 
ualties to personnel. The evolution of “clear ship’’ 
is divided into two stages designated as: 1. Strip 
Ship; and 2. Clear Ship for Action. 
A ship is “stripped” when war is impending and 
it is done by landing (putting on shore) all loose and 
inflammable articles and furnishings, such as chests, 
lockers, bulletin boards, unnecessary stanchions, 
davits, and canopy frames, unnecessary clothing of 
officers and men, etc., spars which can be spared, and 
all boats except such as are designated for retention 
by the commander in chief. Articles so essential to 
a ship that they cannot be left on shore, such arti- 
cles, for example, as are required in daily use and 
which would be valuable after an action, are not 
disposed of until action with the enemy is imminent 
and the second stage of clear ship takes place. 
A ship is “cleared for action” when action with the 
enemy is imminent. When the order to “clear ship 
for action” is given, all such articles as have been LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
295 
kept on board instead of being landed in the strip- 
ship stage must be so disposed of as to provide against 
fire and splinters and insure an uninterrupted serv- 
ice of the batteries. Such disposition consists of 
throwing the articles overboard, stowing them 
below decks, or stowing them behind armor. The 
general duties in connection with “clear ship for 
action” are shown in detail on the ship’s battle bill. 
In either stage of the evolution of “clear ship” in 
preparing the ship for battle, the medical depart- 
ment, having arranged for distribution of the medical 
supplies and equipment to battle dressing stations, 
and first-aid supplies to battle stations, takes over 
and equips space adjacent to each battle dressing 
station cleared of peacetime usage and assigned to 
the medical department for the receipt of a consid- 
erable number of battle personnel casualties, for 
example, 10 percent of the crew at each battle dress- 
ing station. 
Battle dressing stations are located, when possible, 
one forward and one aft, with a third amidships on 
some large vessels. Being behind armor they are 
also known as medical protected stations, and the 
one offering the best facilities for operating after 
battle is equipped with that purpose in view. The 
best surgical outfit and the best sterilizing outfit 
should be placed at that station. 296 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
During the period of a war a ship is at all times in 
some “condition of readiness for action”, depending 
upon the requirements of the existing situation. 
These conditions of readiness for action concern both 
material and personnel, are designated as conditions 
1,2, and 3, and the plans for preparation of the ship 
for battle take cognizance of them. 
Readiness for Action, condition I.—ln this condi- 
tion the entire crew, officers and men, is at battle 
stations, and there is complete readiness for action 
in all respects. This condition of readiness is taken 
if reports of enemy movement indicate that action 
is possible; when a ship is proceeding to sea and 
before it has passed the last antisubmarine net or 
barrier and is maintained until a different condition 
of readiness is signaled or as previously directed by 
specific orders; and immediately the enemy is sighted 
or reported in sight by a vessel in the vicinity. 
Readiness for Action, condition 2.—ln this condi- 
tion approximately one-half of the crew is at battle 
stations: otherwise the ship is ready for action. This 
condition is taken when the visibility is below 6 miles 
in daylight, or at night in an area within which 
enemy surface vessels may be encountered but no 
reports of the enemy have been received. Meeting 
the enemy while in condition 2 will be in the nature 
of a surprise. The organization plan of a ship must LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
297 
provide for promptly passing from this condition to 
condition 1. 
Readiness for Action, condition 3.—ln this condi- 
tion approximately one-third of the crew is at battle 
stations for 4-hour watches; the ship otherwise being 
in readiness for action. This condition is used day 
and night when cruising in an area within which 
contact with enemy surface ships is improbable, un- 
less another condition of readiness has been pre- 
scribed. 
The material condition of the ship varies somewhat 
in the different readiness-for-action conditions and 
is indicated by letters. One letter closes hatches, 
doors, etc. to produce the maximum of watertight in- 
tegrity and defense against gas and chemicals, and 
this material condition, in a major engagement is 
synchronous with the personnel condition in which 
all hands are at battle stations. This material con- 
dition is modified by opening certain doors, hatches, 
blowers, etc., thereby permitting enough air condi- 
tioning through artificial and natural ventilation to 
make battle stations more habitable. Additional re- 
laxation of material closures permits better ventila- 
tion, improves the habitability of battle stations, and 
is used during war cruising, especially in tropical 
climates. 298 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
“General Quarters” is the principal battle exercise 
held on board ship and the object of this exercise is 
to make sure that the ship is in all respects ready for 
battle. This exercise requires the entire ship’s com- 
pany to be at battle stations and whenever it is held 
all the preparations and dispositions that would be 
made in clearing ship for action are carried out, 
except that articles that would be removed in pre- 
paring for actual battle are not so removed but are 
labelled “overboard.” 
The signal for this exercise is: (a) The ringing of 
the general-alarm gongs; (b) Sounding the call 
“General Quarters” on the bugle; and (c) Passing 
the word “general quarters” over the interior com- 
munication system. On hearing the signals every 
officer and man proceeds to his respective station 
“on the double” and on arrival there they perform 
the same duties they would in actual battle. 
At “general quarters” various conditions of battle 
are simulated, with the enemy supposedly attacking 
under water, on the surface, or in the air. On differ- 
ent occasions the ship will be presumed to be: At 
anchor; under way; repulsing an attack by destroy- 
ers; fighting another similar or a distinctly different 
type of ship; engaged in a fleet action; repulsing 
several vessels attacking at once; etc. During the 
exercise casualties also are to be simulated in much LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
299 
the same manner and at such time as to closely 
approximate a real casualty. 
The general duties of the medical department per- 
sonnel at “general quarters” with the ship in Readi- 
ness for Action, condition 1, are as follows: Officers 
and men of the medical department assigned to the 
battle-dressing stations proceed to their stations, 
taking with them all patients from the sick bay and 
such apparatus and material as are listed for that 
purpose and may be required. Other men of the 
medical department proceed to stations assigned. 
It is not necessary or expedient to remove the sick at 
each drill, but it should be practiced often enough 
to insure rapid and comfortable transportation for 
the sick. Crew personnel trained as litter bearers 
during general quarters are assigned to damage con- 
trol repair parties and other stations and when the 
opening of hatches and doers is directed by central 
station, they become available for transportation of 
the wounded. When “general quarters” is held 
under the condition of Readiness for Action, condi- 
tion 2, the medical department personnel at dressing 
stations maintains communication watches, with the 
personnel reduced one-half; under Readiness for 
Action, condition 3, communication watches are 
maintained and routine care of the sick is carried on. 
486912°—43—20 300 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
The casualties to be simulated during exercise at 
“general quarters” are such as would cause damage 
to the material condition of the ship. It must be 
remembered that a naval vessel is built, equipped, 
and manned for the purpose of inflicting damage 
upon an enemy, and, as the purpose of the enemy 
is the same, it is probable that the opposing forces 
will both receive damage in an engagement. In a 
ship’s battle organization provision is made to mini- 
mize the damage inflicted on the ship by an enemy. 
This battle function is termed “damage control” and 
is directed from the central station of the interior 
communication system. As mobility and floatability 
of the ship are essential to the maintenance of effec- 
tive firing by the ship’s batteries, “damage control 
devotes much attention to the watertight and gas- 
tight doors and hatches by which a ship is divided 
into compartments and the ship’s watertight and 
gastight integrity is maintained. 
In an engagement material damage on a ship 
will seldom occur without concurrent damage to per- 
sonnel, for whose care the medical department is 
responsible. But because the majority of medical 
department personnel is located at the battle- 
dressing stations which are located in compartments 
shut off from the rest of the ship, the wounded must 
remain where they are until such time as modifica- LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
301 
tion of the tightly closed condition of the ship per- 
mits their removal to a battle dressing station. In 
the interim their care is dependent upon the first- 
aid knowledge of their companions in the damaged 
compartment. As soon as the situation warrants, 
repair parties proceed to damaged compartments 
to make such repairs to material as are possible and 
litter bearers begin to move the wounded. Hospital 
corpsmen accompany repair parties to direct and 
assist in first aid and transportation of the wounded 
but an adequate number must remain at the battle 
dressing stations in order to assist the medical and 
dental officers in treating casualties. 
8-16. (a) The primary duty of the medical de- 
partment in battle is the conservation of effective 
manpower. In carrying out this part of its task 
the organization of the medical department must be 
in accord with two fundamental principles of “dam- 
age control” requiring that: (1) The watertight in- 
tegrity of the ship, regardless of the wounded, must 
be maintained; and (2) Fire power as delivered by 
the batteries of the ship, regardless of the wounded, 
must be maintained. Therefore, consistent with 
these principles, medical material and personnel 
must be so distributed and all ship’s personnel so 
TASK 302 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
trained in first aid and the transportation of the 
wounded that first aid can be rendered with maxi- 
mum effectiveness and with the minimum of inter- 
ference with the ship’s battle organization. Also, 
in conserving effective manpower at the guns or 
elsewhere, it must be the policy to care for the 
wounded in the following order of priority: 
1. Those with minor injuries and able to resume 
their duties, either actively or as reliefs, 
should be given prompt treatment at or near 
the scene of injury and returned immediately 
to their battle stations. This treatment pre- 
sumably will be given by nonmedical person- 
nel using the first-aid material present in 
the compartment or at the guns. 
2. Those seriously injured should be given such 
treatment as is possible during action, their 
major treatment awaiting the end of the ac- 
tion. It is the assumption that personnel cas- 
ualties will occur about the area of material 
damage and first-aid treatment, especially 
lifesaving measures such as the application of 
a tourniquet, etc., should be given by anyone 
at the scene. The suffering of noneffectives 
should be relieved by morphine injection and 
they and the dead should be laid aside so as 
not to interfere with the fighting of the ship, LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
303 
the dead being placed out of sight of the men 
in action, insofar as possible, and collected 
after the action. 
(b) A secondary duty of the medical department 
in battle concerns the prior training of the entire 
crew in simple lifesaving first-aid measures so that 
such measures can be carried out during action by 
any individual present where injuries occur. In this 
training special attention should be given to: 
1. Handling, lifting, and transportation of casual- 
ties, with and without litter. 
2. Control of hemorrhage, particularly by the ap- 
plication of a tourniquet to the arm or the 
leg. 
3. Sterilization of wounds with iodine and the ap- 
plication of dressings (first-aid packet). 
4. Resuscitation of the apparently drowned and 
the electrically shocked. 
5. Emergency treatment of burns and chemical and 
gas injuries. 
6. Recognition of the need for immobilization of 
fractures and methods of splinting and lift- 
ing. 
7. Control of shock and pain and the relief of suf- 
fering by administering morphine by syringe 
or syrette. 
All division officers, litter bearers (bandsmen) and 
certain other key men should be given special in- 304 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
struction in advanced first aid, including gas casu- 
alty first aid. Such specially trained persons act as 
first-aid supervisors. 
ORGANIZATION 
8-17. The battle organization of the medical de- 
partment of a ship should provide for peacetime pre- 
paredness and wartime preparedness. 
Peacetime preparedness. 
8-18. The objective of the peacetime battle or- 
ganization is to maintain a state of readiness 
that is consistent with economy and peacetime oper- 
ations of the ship and will permit the final prepara- 
tion for battle with the minimum delay. To this end 
material and personnel readiness must be main- 
tained at all times. 
8-19. Material Readiness.—(a) All permanent 
installations at battle dressing stations must be 
maintained in a condition of readiness. This will 
include: (1) Upkeep of reserve water supply tanks 
and fixtures; (2) Upkeep of electric water heating 
systems; (3) Provide lockers at battle dressing sta- 
tions for stowing battle dressings, equipment, and 
supplies at “Clear Ship”; (4) Upkeep of perma- 
nently installed sterilizers; and (5) Upkeep of elec- 
trical leads for battle lights and portable sterilizers. LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
305 
(b) Have on board a sufficient number of first-aid 
boxes. ( Approximately 5 percent of the crew.) 
(c) Have on board large first-aid lockers to cor- 
respond in number and location to the collecting 
stations in battle. 
id) Keep on hand all equipment of a stable or 
durable character for rigging the battle dressing 
stations and provisioning all first-aid lockers, boxes, 
and bags. 
(e) Stow all equipment and supplies, except items 
in daily use, which are intended for the battle 
dressing stations and first-aid lockers, etc., in the 
battle dressing storeroom. Certain items which will 
deteriorate, such as adhesive tape, etc., should be 
used from the battle dressing storeroom and replen- 
ished with fresh items upon receipt of new requi- 
sitions. The equipment and supplies stowed in the 
battle dressing storeroom should be segregated 
according to the place for which they are intended 
to facilitate their transfer at “Clear Ship.” 
(/) An emergency wartime requisition should be 
prepared and kept in the commanding officer’s safe 
for forwarding upon mobilization. 
(g) Certain spaces, in addition to the regular pro- 
tected battle-dressing stations should be designated 
as “Wounded Collecting Stations.” 306 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
(h) Gas decontamination stations should be 
established. 
8-20. Personnel Readiness.—(a) All non-medical 
personnel must be instructed and trained in render- 
ing first aid in battle. This is accomplished by in- 
structing all hands in the crew, by divisions, in ele- 
mentary first aid and in handling and transporting 
the wounded, and by giving special quarterly instruc- 
tion in advanced first aid, including gas casualty 
first aid, to all division officers, litter bearers (bands- 
men) , and key men of the crew. 
(b) All medical personnel must become thor- 
oughly acquainted with the provisions of the ship’s 
battle bill that concerns them and so well instructed 
in them that each one knows his battle station, 
exactly what he is to supply, and what he is to do 
when he arrives at his station. 
Wartime preparedness. 
8-21. Upon mobilization for war the ship ordi- 
narily proceeds to a navy yard or naval base to “strip 
ship” and prepare for war. The preparations of the 
medical department are carried out in accordance 
with its “strip ship” bill and concern both material 
and personnel. 
8-22. Material.—(a) All nonessential items are 
transferred ashore in accordance with the ship’s 
“clear ship” bill. LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
307 
(b) At this time the following work must be ac- 
complished: (1) Procure wartime supplies (as per 
requisition on file in the commanding officer’s safe); 
(2) Manufacture an adequate supply of large and 
small battle dressings; (3> Prepare identification 
tags for all hands; (4) Provision and distribute first- 
aid boxes and bags; (5> Provision and distribute 
portable emergency lockers; (6) Establish and equip 
gas-decontamination stations; (7) Replace all mat- 
tresses with hair mattresses (if available); (8) Stow 
miscellaneous items constituting missile hazards in 
medical storeroom; (9) Overhaul sterilizers; and 
procure spare heating units and portable battery 
spotlights; (10) See that all wounded collecting sta- 
tions and gas casualty first-aid stations are marked 
plainly with red letters. All routes leading to battle 
dressing and collecting stations should be plainly in- 
dicated by an arrow and a red cross, and hatchways 
leading up from the dressing stations should be 
marked “Access” in red letters: and (11) Distribute 
medical supplies to widely separated storerooms so 
that they may be readily accessible and guard 
against total loss in case of a shell hit. 
8-23. Personnel.—(a) Upon mobilization the full 
complement of hospital corpsmen and litter bearers 
should be procured. 308 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
(b) Immediately proceed with the intensive train- 
ing of: (1) The crew in first aid, including the ad- 
ministration of morphine and transportation of the 
wounded; (2) Medical patrols and nonmedical first- 
aid men; and (3) Surgical teams. 
8-24. “Clear Ship” is carried out when a battle is 
expected and ordinarily may be accomplished in two 
phases but circumstances may require that it be 
done in one operation. 
8-25. phase I.— (a) Material.—(l) Rig and equip 
battle dressing stations: (2) Transfer all health 
records and the Journal of the Medical Department 
to the main battle dressing station, and stow other 
records and files in the medical storeroom; (3) Move 
biologicals to ship’s refrigerators; (4) Pass out first- 
aid packets to all hands; (5) Throw contents of acid 
and ether chests overboard; (6) Check all first-aid 
boxes, portable lockers and first-aid bags, and pro- 
vide with syrettes of morphine; (7) Issue first-aid 
bags to stations having more than one man and not 
more than seven men; (8) Throw overboard readily 
inflammable gear (waste, polish, oil, floor wax, 
brooms, squilgees, etc.); (9) Remove typewriters, 
X-ray equipment, dental lights and engines, cabinets, 
laboratory and dispensary equipment to medical 
storeroom, and all miscellaneous items that may con- 
stitute missile hazards; (10) Distribute alcohol, mor- LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
309 
phine sulfate, morphine and atropine, and extra 
blankets to battle dressing stations: (11) Remove 
surgical outfit (surgical rolls) from operating room 
to forward battle dressing station, and other items 
of equipment to battle dressing storeroom; (12) 
Issue Hospital Corps pouches equipped with morphine 
syrettes to each hospital corpsman; (13) Issue 
brassards (badge, arm, red-cross) to all medical 
personnel and litter bearers; (14) Fill reserve water 
tanks at battle dressing stations; (15) Provide 
emergency rations, and coffee, tea, etc., for battle 
dressing stations; (16) Distribute two (2) Thomas 
leg splints to each medical patrol; (17) See that 
metal litters are at their proper locations; and (18) 
Stow bedding. 
(b) Personnel.—Establish a watch at battle dress- 
ing stations after they are rigged. 
8-26. phase ii.—(a) Material.—(1) Lash up all 
bunks in sick bay; (2) Turn on water heaters and 
sterilizers at battle dressing stations; and (3) Equip 
litters with blankets and pillows. 
(b) Personnel.—(1) Transfer all patients from 
sick bay to forward battle dressing station; and (2) 
Establish “condition” watch in accordance with ship’s 
battle bill. 
8-27. All medical material should be in its proper 
place and all medical personnel in their respective 310 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
parts of the ship when battle is joined, for with the 
ship in the condition of watertight integrity there is 
little or no opportunity for improving material or 
personnel readiness. 
First aid during battle. 
8-28. By the Crew.—With the ship in the condi- 
tion of watertight integrity the responsibility of 
rendering immediate first aid to the wounded at 
stations and in spaces where medical personnel is 
not available rests on nonmedical personnel who 
make use of the first-aid material at hand. In the 
absence or incapacitation of an officer, the senior 
first-aid supervisor directs the first-aid work. 
8-29. By the Medical Patrols.—Medical patrols 
composed of one hospital corpsman and two litter 
bearers render such first aid as possible during con- 
dition of water-tight integrity They move with the 
repair parties and render such first aid as may be 
necessary at the scene of the casualty and return the 
non-effectives to the wounded collecting stations in- 
sofar as may be possible. They move the dead away 
from the scene of action, but make no attempt to 
collect them while the battle is in progress. 
8-30. By the Surgical Teams.—The surgical teams 
and other personnel assigned to the protected battle 
dressing stations do not leave their stations to render LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
311 
first aid while the condition of watertight integrity is 
set. They render such first aid as may be necessary 
within the watertight confines of the battle dressing 
stations to personnel injured in the compartment or 
brought in by the medical patrols. The primary 
functions of the medical personnel at the battle 
dressing stations is to render major first aid after 
the battle. 
The medical department after battle. 
8-31. After battle, or during a major lull in the 
battle, the medical-department personnel remains at 
its stations unless otherwise ordered. The work of 
the medical department after an engagement resolves 
itself into four separate functions as follows: (1) 
The collection of the wounded; (2) The treatment of 
the wounded; (3) The evacuation of the wounded; 
and (4) The care and disposition of the dead. 
8-32. Collection of the Wounded.—As soon as 
the condition of watertight integrity is unset, each 
medical patrol reports to the medical officer with a 
tally of the wounded, and awaits further instructions. 
A Hospital Corps watch is then established at each 
station where wounded are located. 
8-33. Treatment of the Wounded.—The surgical 
teams proceed to the various wounded collecting sta- 
tions to render such treatment as may be indicated. 312 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
After all the wounded have been seen and an accu- 
rate record obtained it may be advisable to concen- 
trate them at fewer places. In case another engage- 
ment is anticipated, they should be moved to the 
protected spaces. 
8-34. Evacuation of the Wounded.—The seriously 
wounded and noneffectives should be transferred to 
a hospital ship or a hospital ashore at the first oppor- 
tunity consistent with their welfare. Patients with 
minor wounds who may be returned to duty in a 
few days should be retained on board. Patients 
transferred to a hospital ship or a hospital on shore 
should be tagged and be accompanied by the cus- 
tomary records, if time and facilities permit. 
8-35. Care and Disposition of the Dead.—After 
the wounded have been collected, all litter bearers, 
under the direction of the medical officer, proceed to 
collect, identify, tag, and prepare a list of the dead. 
The dead are placed in such spaces as the command- 
ing officer may direct. The care, the length of time 
they will be kept on board, and the final disposition 
of the dead depends upon several factors, namely: 
(1) The number of dead; (2) The atmospheric tem- 
perature; (3) The material condition of the ship; 
and (4) The distance from port. 
8-36. Reports of Killed and Wounded.—As soon 
as possible after a battle the medical officer care- LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
313 
fully makes out reports of the killed and wounded 
and sends one copy to the commanding officer and 
another, via the commanding officer, to the com- 
mander in chief. 
Gas defense. 
8-37. The medical department’s function in gas 
defense is advisory only. The providing of gas 
masks, impregnated clothing, and other measures 
for the prevention of gas casualties are the responsi- 
bility of another ship’s department. 
There should be an adequate number of decon- 
tamination stations throughout the ship, each of 
which should be equipped with fresh-water showers. 
A portable first-aid locker should be kept in readi- 
ness and installed at each station at “Strip Ship.” 
The location of these stations is determined by the 
ship’s organization. 
8-38. The Medical Department in Gas Defense.— 
After exposure of personnel to war chemicals (vapor 
or liquid) the treatment of those exposed becomes 
the responsibility of the medical department. 
Medical personnel are assigned to decontamina- 
tion stations in accordance with the ship’s organ- 
ization bill. They man their stations when the word 
“Gas Attack” is passed, and should wear impreg- 
nated clothing, rubber gloves, and have gas masks 
available for use if necessary. 314 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
8-39. Treatment of “Gassed” Cases.—(a) In treat- 
ing personnel who have been exposed to war chemi- 
cals the policy should be: (1) To decontaminate 
those cases showing little or no disability and re- 
turn them to their battle stations. This group in- 
cludes those who have had their skin only exposed 
to a vesicant agent; and (2) To render first aid and 
follow-up treatment to those who are incapacitated 
by chemical agents. This group includes those who 
have inhaled gas (lung casualties) or who have had 
prolonged exposure to vesicants prior to decontami- 
nation. If the vesicant remains on the skin over 15 
or 20 minutes, a burn will result. 
(b) Although detailed written instructions should 
be a part of each decontamination first-a!d locker’s 
contents, in general the procedure should be as fol- 
lows: (1) After gas attack or when word is passed, 
personnel who have been exposed start to the nearest 
decontamination station by a designated route; (2) 
Remove all clothing and gas mask before leaving 
weather deck to go below; (3) Proceed to decontami- 
nation station: and (4) Apply for decontamination. 
(c) decontamination.—(1) Each man is rapidly 
inspected for stains from “mustard liquid.” Such 
areas should be swabbed several times with carbon 
tetrachloride, using a clean cloth or cotton for each 
application. LANDING FORCES AND SHIP BATTLE DRILL 
315 
(2) Each man takes a full shower bath, using 
plenty of fresh, hot water and strong soap, making 
a good lather. 
(3) Each man is again inspected by the hospital 
corpsman, and if there is no disability, he leaves 
the station by the exit door. 
(4) Each man obtains clean clothing and returns 
to his battle station. 
Special notes on Lewisite.—The use of Lewisite as 
a spray is possible. Burns from this liquid appear 
as grayish blotches, usually within 15 to 20 minutes 
after exposure. These areas should be scrubbed with 
5-percent sodium hydroxide solution at once. After 
the bath the burns should be covered with ferric 
hydrate paste and a dressing applied. 
Special notes on mustard gas.—The skin burns and 
irritation from mustard gas requires 2 to 6 hours for 
development. If the man is properly decontami- 
nated, burns may not occur, and the sooner after 
exposure the decontamination occurs, the less the 
likelihood of serious burns. 
id) after decontamination, all men who are able 
to do so should report to their battle stations. The 
hospital corpsman at the decontamination station 
must use his best judgment to determine which men 
need further treatment. Those who have inhaled 
486912°—43 21 316 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
the gas, or whose faces have been splashed with 
liquid vesicant, may become serious casualties. Such 
men and others unable to return to their battle 
stations after being thoroughly decontaminated will 
be evacuated to the nearest battle dressing station 
by litter bearers if necessary. 
Lung casualties must be kept flat on their backs, 
moved by litter to a battle dressing station, and 
administered oxygen. 
Vesicant hums about the face, eyes, mouth, etc., 
should be treated by frequent bathing with boric 
acid solution. 
Extreme mustard or Lewisite hum cases should 
be moved to a battle dressing station and treated 
by a medical officer. 
All cases transferred to the battle dressing sta- 
tions must he thoroughly decontaminated before 
being moved to those stations. CHAPTER IX 
TENT DRILL AND SHELTER 
Section I—PITCHING SINGLE SHELTER TENTS 
9-1. Purpose.—The purpose of this instruction is 
to enable a commander to establish his unit rapidly 
and correctly in single shelter tents, arranged in a 
neat.and orderly way. 
9-2. Formation.—Normally platoons form in line 
and companies form in column of platoons to pitch 
shelter tents. If the terrain does not permit this 
formation, the company commander indicates the 
general disposition for platoons. 
9-3. Commands.—(a) 1. form for shelter tents to 
THE LEFT (RIGHT), 2. MARCH, 3. DRESS RIGHT (LEFT), 
4. DRESS, 5. READY, 6. FRONT, 7. COUNT OFF. (b) 
PITCH TENTS. 
9_4 Execution—(a) forming.—(l) At the com- 
mand FORM FOR SHELTER TENTS TO THE LEFT (RIGHT), 
the second in command moves to a position on the 
right of the guide who is on the right of the right 
man of the front rank. The messenger takes position 
on the left of the left man of the rear rank. 
(2) At the command MARCH, all squads, except 
the front squad, face to the left in marching and 
317 318 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
step off. Squad leaders by giving appropriate com- 
mands: 1. BY THE RIGHT (LEFT) FLANK, 2. MARCH, 
and 1. squad, 2. HALT, move their squads into line 
abreast of the squad(s) already on line. 
(3) At the commands 3. dress right (left), 4. 
DRESS, 5. ready, 6. FRONT, and 7. COUNT OFF, 
given by the platoon leader the entire rank executes 
these movements as prescribed in paragraphs 5-4 
and 5-5. 
(b) pitching tents.—(l)At the command PITCH 
TENTS, each odd-numbered man marks a spot with 
his left heel; this marks the position for the front 
pole of the tent. 
(2) Men then unsling equipment and place it in 
front of them; open their packs and remove their 
shelter halves, poles, and pins. 
Odd and even numbers (Nos. 1 and 2; Nos. 3 and 4; 
etc.) pitch tents together. They spread their shelter 
halves on the ground the tent is to occupy, triangle 
to the rear, buttons to the center, the odd numbered 
man’s half on the right. 
(3) They then button the halves together along 
the ridge. The odd numbered man adjusts his pole, 
inserts its small end through inner pair of front eye- 
lets of the tent, and holds the pole upright at the 
point previously marked by his heel. The even num- 
bered man pins down the front corners of the tent TENT DRILL AND SHELTER 
319 
in such a manner that the corner pins and front 
corners of the tent and front pole form a straight 
line; he then measures off, on the tent rope, the dis- 
tance from the base of the front tent pole to the 
right or left front tent pin and drives the front guy 
pin this distance in front of the front tent pole. He 
places the loop of the guy rope alongside the front 
guy pin and hands the other end to the odd num- 
bered man who passes it through the outer pair of 
the front eyelets from top to bottom, and ties it in 
a knot so that it will hold the pole vertical when the 
rope is taut. 
The even numbered man then places the loop of 
the guy rope over the front guy pin (fig. 99). Both 
men then proceed to the rear of their tent. The 
even numbered man adjusts his pole and guy rope 
as previously described, while the odd numbered man 
pins the rear tent corners and drives, the rear guy 
pin, adjusts the rear guy rope, buttons the triangular 
ends together, and pins the rear triangle. The even 
numbered man drives the remaining pins on the 
right, and the odd numbered man drives them on 
the left (fig. 100). (A tool with a flat head such as 
a hammer or hand axe should be used to drive tent 
pegs. However, if such a tool is not available, a brick 
or rock may be used for this purpose.) 320 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Even numbered man 
Figure 99.—Pitching shelter tent, front end. (L. F. M.. U. S. Navy.) 
Odd numbered man TENT DRILLS AND SHELTER 
321 
Even numbered man 
Figure 100.—Pitching shelter tent, rear end. (L. P. M., U. S. Navy.) 
Odd numbered man 322 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
9-5. Inspection of Tents and Equipment, (a) 
After tents are pitched, and when directed to lay 
out equipment for inspection, each man arranges 
the contents of his pack in front of his own half of 
the tent in the prescribed manner. After the equip- 
ment is laid out, the organization commander com- 
mands: PREPARE FOR INSPECTION. At this 
command each man stands at attention by the side 
of his own shelter half, toes on line with the front 
corner tent pins. The commander then inspects 
the tents and equipment. 
(b) Laying out of equipment may be dispensed 
with. 
9-6. Supervision. Platoon leaders supervise their 
platoons. They are responsible for an exact align- 
ment of the poles and guy rope pins. 
Section 2.—PITCHING DOUBLE SHELTER TENTS 
9-7. Purpose.—The purpose of this instruction is 
to establish the unit rapidly and correctly in a double 
tent camp, arranged in a neat and orderly manner. 
The double tent is preferable to the single tent in 
cold or inclement weather because it affords superior 
shelter. It is useful in restricted areas, because of 
its greater concentration of personnel. The double 
tent is composed of two single tents buttoned to- 
gether at the square ends. The tent is supported by TENT DRILL AND SHELTER 
323 
three poles; one in the center and one at each end. 
Two guy ropes are attached to each end. Guy pins 
are in line with the side pins of the ten. Each set 
of fours (Nos. 1, 2. 3, and 4; Nos. 5,6, 7, and 8, etc.) 
pitch and occupy one double tent. 
9-8. Formation.—The same as for single tents in 
Section 1. 
9 9. Commands.—(a) 1. form for shelter tents to 
THE LEFT (RIGHT), 2. MARCH, 3. DRESS RIGHT (LEFT), 
4. DRESS, 5. READY, 6. FRONT, 7. COUNT OFF. 
(b) PITCH DOUBLE TENTS. 
9-10. Execution.—(a) forming.—At the com- 
mands the movements are executed as for single 
tents given in Section 1. 
(b) pitching double tents.—(l) At the command 
PITCH DOUBLE TENTS, all men proceed as for 
single tents (see par. 9-4 (5)), except that only every 
fourth man (Nos. 1,5, 9, etc.) marks the location 
for the front pole. 
(2) After front pole locations have been made, 
all men spread their shelter halves on the ground 
to be occupied by their respective tents. Odd num- 
bered men place their shelter halves with the tri- 
angles to the front; the even numbered men place 
theirs with the triangles to the rear. 
(3) They button together the four shelter halves 
of each tent, the ridges first, then the square ends. 324 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
The odd numbers insert and support the front and 
rear poles, the front pole in the place previously 
marked, the rear pole in a line with it perpendicular 
to the line of front poles. The even numbers pin the 
front and rear corners of the tent. One even num- 
ber then enters the tent with his pole and, assisted 
by the other even number, adjusts the pole to the 
center of the shelter halves. He inserts the top of 
the pole, in the following order, through the eyelets 
of the lower half of the front tent, the lower half 
of the rear tent, the upper half of the front tent, 
and the upper half of the rear tent. The even num- 
bers then fasten the guy ropes and all drive the 
remaining pins and turn back the four triangular 
ends. 
9-11. Inspection of Double Tents and Equip- 
ment.—(a) After the double tents are pitched, and 
when directed to lay out equipment for inspection, 
each man arranges the contents of his pack in front 
of his own shelter half as prescribed in paragraph 
9-5. (The double tent is open at both ends.) After 
the equipment is laid out, the organization com- 
mander commands: PREPARE FOR INSPECTION. 
At this command each man stands at attention 
by the side of his shelter half, facing outward, 
toes on line with the corner tent pins. The organi- TENT DRILL AND SHELTER 
325 
zation commander then inspects the tent and equip- 
ment. 
(b) Laying out of equipment may be dispensed 
with. 
Section 3.—STRIKING SHELTER TENTS 
9-12. To Strike Tents.—(a) At the command 
STRIKE TENTS, the men remove their equipment 
from the tents, pull up pins, unbutton the halves, and 
make up their packs. They sling their equipment 
and stand at attention in the positions originally 
occupied after taking interval before the command 
PITCH TENTS. The unit is then assembled by ap- 
propriate command for the formation. 
(b) When it is desired to strike tents simultane- 
ously, The General is sounded as a signal for striking 
tents. They are prepared for striking by pulling up 
the pins but are held in an upright position by one 
man at each pole until the last note of the bugle, 
when all are caused to fall simultaneously to the 
right or as may be otherwise previously directed. 
9-13. The tentage of a hospital company consists 
of hospital tents and appendages, pyramidal tents, 
wall tents, and storage tents, the number of each 
Section 4.—MEDICAL TENTAGE 326 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
depending upon the situation and/or authoritative 
allowance tables. 
9-14. Wall and Hospital Tents.—(a) pitching.— 
1. Preliminary arrangements. The officer or petty 
officer in charge selects suitable ground. He indi- 
cates the direction in which the tents are to face, 
the line on which they are to be placed, and the 
position of the door pins. Four men are required 
to pitch each tent. 
2. Procedure for each tent.—a. First a pin is driven 
to mark the center of the door. Then the tent is 
spread on the ground it is to occupy, the door loops 
being placed over the door pin. The front corners 
are drawn taut, aligned, and pegged down. The rear 
door is laced, if there is one, and the rear corners 
are drawn taut in both directions and pegged down. 
The four corner guy pins are then placed at points 
in prolongation of the diagonals of the tent and 
about two paces beyond the corner pins and driven in. 
h. The front door is temporarily loosened, and the 
two corner loops on one side only are loosened from 
the corner pins. The ridge pole is inserted between 
the ventilation strip and the tent ridge. The upright 
eyelet pins are inserted in the ridge pole and in the 
eyelets of the tent, and the fly eyelets are placed 
over the end-pole eyelet pins. The tent is then 
raised and held in position, the two loosened corner TENT DRILL AND SHELTER 
327 
loops are replaced, and the corner and fly guy ropes 
secured and tightened to hold the poles vertical. The 
wall pins are driven in through the open loops as 
they hang. Finally, the intermediate guy pins are 
driven in in alignment with the corner guy pins. 
(b) striking.—The men first remove all pins ex- 
cept those of the four corner guy ropes. The pins 
are pulled and neatly placed in a receptacle. One 
man holds each corner guy rope and the tent is low- 
ered. The poles are removed and fastened to- 
gether, the tent is folded, and the remaining pins 
collected. 
(c) folding.—l. The tent is first spread on the 
ground and folded at the ridge so that the bottoms of 
the side walls are even, the ends of the tent forming 
triangles to the right and the left. The triangular 
ends of the tent are folded in towards the middle, 
so that the whole then forms a rectangle. The top 
is folded over about 9 inches and the tent then folded 
twice by carrying the top fold over to the foot and 
again from the top to the foot. 
2. All guy ropes are thrown on the tent except the 
second from each end. The ends are folded in so as 
to cover about two-thirds of the second widths. The 
left end is then folded over to meet the turned-in 
edge of the right end; the right end then is folded 
over at the turned-in edge, and again folded over 328 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
the top to the left end, completing the bundle. 
Finally, the bundle is tied with the two exposed guy 
ropes. 
9-15. Pyramidal Tents.—(a) pitching.—l. Pre- 
liminary arrangements.—The ground on which the 
tents are to be erected having been designated, the 
line of tents is marked by driving a wall pin on the 
spot to be occupied by the right front corner of each 
tent. The interval between adjacent marking pins 
should be 30 feet, which leaves a space of about 2 feet 
between tents. Each tent is usually erected by the 
men who will occupy it. 
2. Procedure for each tent.—a. The tent is spread 
on the ground which it is to occupy, door to the front. 
The corners and the door are laced, and the right 
front wall loop is placed over the corner pin already 
driven. 
b. The left corner wall loop is carried to the left 
as far as it will go, and a wall pin driven through it, 
in line with the right corner pins already driven. 
c. The rear corner wall loops are pulled to the rear 
and outward, so that the bottom of the rear wall of 
the tent is stretched to a complete square. Wall 
pins are then driven through these loops. Each rear 
corner pin should be directly in the rear of its cor- 
responding front corner pin, and with it form a line TENT DRILL AND SHELTER 
329 
perpendicular to the line of front pins to insure that 
the bottom of the tent forms a square. 
d. Three men crawl under the tent and fit the pole 
into the rings, and such accessories as hood, fly, etc., 
are adjusted. 
e. Steadied by one man at each corner guy rope, 
the tent is then raised by the man underneath. 
f. The four corner guy ropes are then placed over 
the lower notches of large pins, which are driven in 
at points located on prolongations of the diagonals at 
such distances as to hold the walls and ends of the 
tent vertical and smooth when the guy ropes are 
drawn taut. At this point the corner poles are in- 
serted by the men inside the tent. 
g. A wall pin is then driven through each remain- 
ing loop, and a large pin for each guy rope is driven 
in in alignment with the four corner guy pins. The 
guy ropes of the tent are placed over the lower 
notches of the large pins and all ropes then drawn 
taut. 
(b) striking.—First, all pins except those of the 
four corner guy ropes and the rear corner wall pins 
are removed and placed in a receptacle. With one 
man holding each corner guy rope, the tent is then 
slowly lowered to the rear. The poles are fastened 
together and the remaining pins collected. 330 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
(c) folding.—l. Procedure for each tent.—a. The 
tent having been lowered to the rear, the back wall 
and roof canvas are pulled out smooth. This is 
accomplished by leaving the rear corner wall pins 
in the ground with the loops attached, while one 
man at each corner guy rope, and one or two holding 
the ventilator-iron square perpendicular, pull the 
canvas to its limit away from the former front of the 
tent. This places the three remaining sides of the 
tent on top of the rear side, with the door side to the 
middle. 
b. To straighten the side wall and roof canvas the 
right front corner is carried over and laid on the 
left front corner. All canvas is pulled smooth, the 
guy ropes thrown toward the ventilator-iron square, 
and the bottom edges pulled even. Then the right 
corner is returned to the right to cover the right 
rear corner. This folds the right side of the tent on 
itself, with a crease in the middle and under the 
front side of the tent. 
c. Next, to straighten the left side wall and roof 
canvas, the left front corner is carried to the right 
and back in a similar fashion. This will leave the 
front and rear side of the tent lying smooth and flat 
and the two side walls folded inward, each on itself. 
d. The ventilator-iron square is folded downward 
toward the bottom of the tent, and then the hood TENT DRILL AND SHELTER 
331 
is placed in the iron square. The tent is now folded 
around the iron square as a core, all folds being 
pressed down flat and smooth, and parallel to the 
bottom of the tent. If each fold is compactly made 
and the canvas is kept smooth, the last fold will 
exactly cover the lower edges of the canvas. 
e. All exposed guys are laid along the folded canvas 
except the two on the center width. These two are 
pulled out and away from the bottom edge, to their 
extreme length so as to be used later for the final 
tying of the bundle. 
/. From one end the bundle is folded toward the 
center hinging on the first seam; that is, the one ad- 
joining the first and second widths. It is again 
folded toward the center, so that the canvas already 
folded will come within about 3 inches of the middle 
width. It is again folded to the opposite edge of the 
middle width of the canvas. 
g. Prom the opposite end the first width is folded 
in half. A second fold comes about 4 or 5 inches 
from the part of the tent already folded from the 
first end. This second fold is then thrown entirely 
over the part already folded. 
h. The exposed guys are drawn taut towards and 
across one another so that they are at right angles. 
The bundle is turned over on the guy rope which is 
486912°—43 22 332 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
the prolongation of the tent seam. The guy ropes 
are crossed on the new top of the bundle. The 
bundle is turned over again on the crossed ropes and 
tied. 
Section S—SHELTER5—SHELTER 
9-16. General.— (a) Good shelter contributes 
greatly to the maintenance of the efficiency of troops 
in the field. The underlying principle is to utilize 
and improve the best available facilities for shelter 
as far as is consistent with the situation. 
(b) According to circumstances, troops are shel- 
tered in bivouac, in camps, or billets. 
1. Troops at rest are in bivouac when not pro- 
vided with overhead cover or when covered by shelter 
tents or hastily improvised shelter. On marches or 
in the presence of the enemy, troops are frequently 
forced to bivouac, but in fine weather, in midsummer, 
or in the dry season in the tropics, they do so from 
choice. For tactical purposes, bivouacs are very con- 
venient, but because of sanitary reasons they are 
resorted to, except for overnight halts, only when 
necessary. The general principles governing the 
selection of camp sites apply to bivouacs. 
2. Troops are in camp when sheltered by tentage 
other than shelter tents or when quartered in canton- 333 
merits; that is, huts or other temporary structures 
especially constructed for military purposes. 
TENT DRILL AND SHELTER 
3. Troops are in billets when they occupy private 
or public buildings not especially designed for mil- 
itary purposes. Billets afford excellent shelter and 
permit the screening of troops from aerial obser- 
vation; they have, moreover, the advantage of offer- 
ing shelter in an immediately available form which 
does not require an expenditure of labor or material. 
Billets do not, however, favor a high degree of readi- 
ness for action, and the tactical situation usually 
renders their use inadvisable in close proximity to 
the enemy. The danger of the transmission of 
disease inherent in billeting requires careful inspec- 
tions and strict enforcement of sanitary rules. Bil- 
leting in the United States and its possessions is 
limited by an amendment to the Constitution which 
provides that “No soldier shall, in time of peace, be 
quartered in any house without the consent of the 
owner; nor in time of war, but in a manner to be 
prescribed by law.” Use may be made of public 
buildings when available, or private buildings may be 
rented. Families are not removed from their dwell- 
ings when it can be avoided. 
9-17. Selection of a Camp Site.— (a) In ample 
time before the end of a day’s march a line officer, a 
medical officer, and a supply officer should ride for- 334 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
ward and select a camp site, unless one has been pre- 
viously arranged. It is difficult to locate an ideal 
camp site which is entirely satisfactory from a sani- 
tary viewpoint. In time of war tactical considera- 
tions have priority over local conditions. 
(b) Points to he considered in determining the 
location of a camp.— 
FAVORABLE 
CONSIDERATIONS 
1. Accessibility to good 
water, fuel, and forage. 
2. Sandy, loam, or gravel 
soil. 
3. Elevated site, well 
drained. 
4. Shade trees, in warm 
weather. 
5. Hills and forests as wind- 
breaks in cold weather. 
6. Should be large enough 
to accommodate the 
command. 
7. Grass-covered location. 
8. Accessible to good roads. 
UNFAVORABLE 
CONSIDERATIONS 
1. Sites occupied within 2 
months by other units. 
2. Clay, alluvial, or dusty 
soil. 
3. Dry river bed, ravine, and 
base of hill, if there is 
a likelihood of rain. 
4. Proximity to marshes, 
swamps, and mosquito- 
breeding areas. 
5. Steep slopes. 
6. Sites where the ground 
water is near the sur- 
face. - 
7. Proximity to native habi- 
tations especially in 
malarial regions. 
8. Inaccessible; poor roads 
or none in the vicinity. 
9-18. Establishing the Camp.—(a) The following 
provisions will be made for shelter: 
1. Establish the outpost if necessary. TENT DRILL AND SHELTER 
335 
2. Establish the interior guard if necessary. 
3. Post guards to enforce proper use of the water 
supply. 
4. Set up kitchen. 
5. Furnish details to pitch hospital, headquarters, 
and officers’ tents; procure fuel, water, forage, etc.; 
and prepare latrine and kitchen pits. 
6. Troops pitch tents of enlisted personnel. 
(b) Details for the foregoing should be made prior 
to arrival at the camp site, preferably before starting 
the march, so as to avoid confusion, insure order 
and save time. 
(c) Ditch the tents as soon as put up, even if camp 
is only for one night. A little rain may spoil a whole 
night’s rest. 
(d) Insure proper ventilation of quarters, espe- 
cially at night. Bedding should be aired twice a 
week. Tent walls should be rolled daily and the 
tents furled once a week, weather permitting. 
(e) See that cooking is carried out in as sanitary 
a manner as possible and that the food is protected 
from dirt and flies, both before and after cooking. 
Have food products whose condition is doubtful, in- 
spected by a medical officer before being used. 
(/) Observe the regulations governing physical in- 
spections and the inspection of food handlers and 
barbers. 336 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
(g) Keep garbage receptacles covered. If fuel is 
available, construct an incinerator for the destruc- 
tion of kitchen waste. An undue number of flies 
in camp is a reflection on the company officers. 
(h) See that the camp is policed daily after 
breakfast and all refuse matter burned. APPENDIX 
General. 
LIFESAVING METHODS 
1. (a) The rescue of drowning persons and the 
resuscitation of the apparently drowned are of par- 
ticular importance to all personnel, especially those 
engaged in landing-force operations. 
(b) The rescue of a drowning person should never 
be attempted by swimming if safer means are avail- 
able. 
(c) Rescues of the apparently drowned usually 
are accomplished in the following ways: (1) From 
shore by wading: (2) By boat; and (3) By swimming. 
(d) The danger of fatal submersion, as far as the 
landing force is concerned is, for the most part, 
limited to the ship-to-shore movement. It may occur 
during embarkation, by the sinking of boats by gun- 
fire, or by loss of control and overturning of boats 
as they hit the beach. The securing of a lee for 
the boats and the use of cargo nets will largely 
eliminate embarkation hazards. Lifeboats detailed 
to accompany the boat convoy provide for rescue 
of personnel en route to the beach. Persons thrown 
into the water by boats being overturned as they 
reach the shore are normally rescued from shore 
by wading. In this last contingency, the primary 
337 338 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
danger is In being trapped or crushed by the boat 
and drowned, unless immediate aid, including resus- 
citation, is immediately forthcoming. 
Resuscitation. 
2. When the Victim Is Brought Ashore Still 
Breathing and Conscious. (a) Do not allow the 
victim to walk or even to stand unsupported. Addi- 
tional effort may taring on a collapse due to the 
physical and mental state caused by fear and ex- 
tremely violent exertion. 
(b) Never apply artificial respiration while the 
victim is still breathing unless it is apparent that 
respiration is about to cease; therefore the rescuer 
should observe the victim at all times in readiness 
to use artificial respiration. 
(c) Artificial Respiration.—Whether the victim 
has ceased to breathe as a result of drowning, 
asphyxia, other forms of suffocation, or electric 
shock, the technique of artificial respiration is the 
same and is as follows: 
(1) Lay the patient on his stomach, one arm ex- 
tended directly overhead, the other arm bent at 
elbow and with face turned outward and resting 
on hand or forearm, so that the nose and mouth 
are free for breathing (fig. 101). 
(2) Kneel astride of one or of both of the patient’s 
thighs, facing towards the head, and with the knees LIFESAVING METHODS 
339 
placed at such a distance from the hip bones as will 
allow assumption of the position illustrated in figure 
101. If only one thigh is straddled it should be the 
one on the side towards which the patient’s face is 
turned so that his face can be easily observed. 
(3) Place the palms of the hands on the small of 
the back with fingers resting on the ribs, the little 
fingers just touching the lowest ribs, with the thumbs 
and fingers in a natural position, and the tips of the 
fingers just out of sight. 
(4) With arms held straight, swing forward slowly, 
so that the weight of the body is gradually brought 
to bear upon the patient. The shoulder should be 
directly over the heel of the hand at the end of the 
forward swing. Do not bend the elbows (fig. 102). 
This operation should take about 2 seconds. 
(5) Now suddenly swing backward, so as to remove 
the pressure completely (fig. 103). 
(6) After 2 seconds, swing forward again. Repeat 
the double movement of compression and release 
deliberately 12 to 15 times a minute, a complete 
respiration in 4 or 5 seconds. 
(7) Continue artificial respiration without inter- 
ruption until natural breathing is restored: if neces- 
sary, 4 hours or longer, or until a medical officer 
declares the patient is dead. 
(8) As soon as artificial respiration has been started 
and while it is being continued, have an assistant HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
340 
Figure 101—Artificial respiration, ready to apply pressure LIFESAVING METHODS 
341 
Figure 102.—Artificial respiration, pressure applied 342 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Figure 103.—Artificial respiration, pressure released. LIFESAVING METHODS 
343 
loosen any tight clothing about the patient’s neck, 
chest, or waist. Keep the patient warm. Do not give 
any liquids whatever by mouth until patient is fully 
conscious. 
(9) To avoid strain on the heart when the patient 
revives, he should be kept lying down and not al- 
lowed to stand or sit up. If a medical officer has 
not arrived by the time the patient has revived, the 
patient should be given some stimulant, such as one 
teaspoonful of aromatic spirit of ammonia in a 
small glass of water or a drink of hot coffee or tea, 
etc. Continue to keep the patient warm. 
(10) Artificial respiration should be carried on at 
the nearest possible point to where the patient re- 
ceived his injuries. He should not be moved from 
this point until he is breathing normally of his own 
volition and then moved only in a lying position. 
Should it be necessary, due to extreme weather con- 
ditions, etc., to move the patient before he is breath- 
ing normally, artificial respiration should be carried 
on while he is being moved. 
(11) A brief return of natural respiration is not a 
certain indication for stopping artificial respiration. 
Not infrequently the patient, after a temporary re- 
covery of respiration, stops breathing again. The 
patient must be watched and artificial respiration 
resumed at once if natural breathing stops. 344 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
(12) In carrying out artificial respiration it may 
be necessary to change the operator. Such change 
must be made without losing the rhythm of respira- 
tion. By this procedure no confusion results at the 
time of change of operator and regular rhythm is 
kept up. 
(d) supplementary treatment.—While carrying 
on artificial respiration, organize helpers but do not 
stop artificial respiration. Send for a physician, 
blankets, hot water bottles or heated bricks, hot 
water or tea or coffee for stimulants (no alcoholics). 
Have patient’s clothing loosened around neck and 
chest; mouth and nose cleared of any mucus or mud, 
and tongue moved back and forth occasionally to 
stimulate reflexes; body and limbs rubbed toward 
the heart. Have blankets and hot water bottles ap- 
plied, but do not apply hot articles next to patient’s 
skin. Place aromatic spirit of ammonia near pa- 
tient’s nose. Prevent a crowd from closing in, so as 
to give the patient plenty of air. Select an intelli- 
gent helper to watch you and so instruct him that he 
may be able to take your place when you need a 
relief. 
Instruction in artificial respiration. 
3. All men at Hospital Corps Schools and hospital 
corpsmen in the lower ratings should be instructed 
frequently in giving artificial respiration. INDEX 
Page 
Abbreviations vi 
Across back (fireman’s) carry 211 
Action— 
clear ship for 294 
phase I 308 
phase II 309 
conditions of readiness for 296 
Additional hospital assistance 292 
Advanced-hospital station 290 
Aid— 
company 287 
first— 
by the— 
company-aid men 273 
crew 310 
medical patrols 310 
surgical teams 310 
during battle 310 
men, company 241, 272,273, 279 
station, battalion 288 
Align, to— 
company, the 93 
squad, the 74 
Alignment , 1 
Ambulance— 
company 242 
station 289 
Anthem, national 21 
Appendix 337 
345 346 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Page 
Arms 205 
and legs— 
carry 224 
combined starting positions of the 41 
carry, in 203. 227 
exercises of the, from the starting positions 46 
starting positions of the 28 
Army litter— 
description of I°l 
instruction in the use of the 106 
manual of the 101 
transportation with 145 
Arrangement for instruction 145 
Artificial respiration 338 
instruction in 344 
Assemble— 
the heavy marching order pack, to 254 
to take interval and to 77 
Assistance— 
additional hospital 292 
medical, echelons of 287 
Assistant— 
battalion surgeon 249 
regimental surgeon 247 
Attached 1 
unit 1 
Attention— 
position of 58 
to march other than at 70 
Back- 
cases, to load and unload 162 
step 68 
Band section 241 
Base 1 INDEX 
347 
Battalion— Page 
aid station 288 
headquarters company 240 
landing force 240 
medical 242 
surgeon 249 
assistant 249 
Battle— 
drill, ship 292 
exercises 293 
first aid during 310 
medical department after 311 
Bearer-s— 
designation of 107, 186 
guidon, positions of, for drills and ceremonies 90 
to— 
carry— 
loaded litter with four 165 
patient by— 
one 236 
two 237 
change 128 
load and unload litter with— 
three 152 
two 152 
Beaten zone 1 
Brigade, landing-force 242 
Bunk— 
display of clothing on 269 
examination of equipment on the 267 
Burn-s— 
cases, extreme mustard or Lewisite___ 316 
vesicant 316 
486912°—43 23 348 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Camp— 
establishing the 334 
inspection of quarters or 100 
site, selection of a 333 
considerations— 
favorable 334 
unfavorable 334 
Care and disposition of the dead 312 
Carry— 
across back (fireman’s) 211 
arms and legs 224 
four-hand grasp 225 
in arms 203, 227 
litter, to 122 
pickaback 211 
rifle-blanket 224 
rifle-overcoat 223 
supporting 201, 232 
tied-hands crawl or 220 
to— 
loaded litter— 
by four bearers 165 
up or down stairs (or ladders) 172 
patient by— 
one bearer 236 
two bearers 237 
Cases— 
back, to load and unload 162 
burn, extreme mustard or Lewisite 316 
“gassed,” treatment of 314 
after decontamination 315 
decontamination 314 
special notes on— 
Lewisite 315 
mustard gas 315 
lung casualties 316 INDEX 
349 
Page 
Casualties, lung 316 
Center 1 
Ceremonies, drills and— 
positions of— 
chief petty officer for 89 
guidon bearer for 90 
Change-s- 
---hearers, to 128 
direction, to 76. 83, 96 
of direction, partial 10 
step, to 70 
Chief petty officer 7 
positions of the, for drills and ceremonies 89 
Clear ship 294, 308 
for action 294 
phase I 308 
phase II 309 
Close— 
Interval— 
between men, to form with 93 
to obtain 74 
litter, to 132 
order 6 
ranks, to open and to 84 
Closed, litter strapped and 107 
Clothing 283 
and individual equipment 252 
display of, on bunk (Marine Corps) 269 
equipment— 
and, for men 253 
uniforms, and personal effects 280 
Coach and pupil method of instruction 1 350 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Collecting— Page 
company 242 
station 288 
Collection of wounded 811 
Colors and quarterdeck, salutes to 22 
Column 2 
of— 
threes (or fours), to form 97 
twos— 
and single file and re-form, to form 87 
from single file and re-form, to form 78 
to form 78 
Command-s I 1 
to revoke a 
Commander, company, inspecting officer other than 99 
Company 89 
aid 287 
men 241, 272, 273, 279 
ambulance 242 
collecting 242 
commander, inspecting officer other than 99 
drill, rules for 90 
headquarters 242 
battalion 240 
regimental 242 
hospital 242 
corpsmen 279 
inspection 98 
formation 98 
procedure 98 
mass, to form 95 
school of the 89 
service 242 INDEX 
351 
Company—Continued. Page 
to— 
align the 93 
dismiss the 94 
form the 91 
Composition— 
and formation of the platoon 80 
litter squad 106 
Conditions of readiness for action 296 
Contents, table of m 
Count off, to 73 
Courtesies— 
military 15 
other than the salute 19 
Crawl or carry, tied-hands 220 
Crew, first aid by the 310 
Dead, care and disposition of the 312 
Decontamination 314 
special notes on— 
Lewisite 315 
mustard gas 315 
Defense, gas 313 
medical department in 313 
Defilade 2 
Definition of litter 101 
Dental officers 249 
Demonstration 2 
Department, medical— 
after battle 311 
in gas defense 313 
on field service 275 
supplies and equipment 284 
Deploy 2 352 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Page 
Depth 2 
Description of Army litter 101 
Designation of— 
bearers 107, 186 
' squads 110 
Detachment, medical 250 
Direction— 
partial changes of 10 
to change 76, 83, 96 
Dismiss, to— 
company, the 94 
platoon, the__ 81 
squad, the 73 
Display of clothing on bunk (Marine Corps) 269 
Disposition of dead, care and 312 
Distance 2 
Double— 
shelter tents, pitching 322, 323 
commands 323 
execution 323 
formation 323 
purpose 322 
time ; 2,9, 66 
marching 66 
Drill-s 235 
and ceremonies, position of— 
chief petty officer for 89 
guidon bearer for 90 
company, rules for 90 
formation 235 
landing forces and ship battle . 239 INDEX 
353 
Drill-s—Continued. Page 
physical 25 
exercises 27 
of the— 
arms, from the starting positions 46 
legs, from the starting positions 43 
formation 25 
standing position, the 27 
starting postion-s 26 
combined, of the arms and legs 41 
exercises of the— 
arms, from the 46 
legs, from the 43 
miscellaneous 37 
of the— 
arms 28 
legs 31 
trunk 36 
precision in 8 
purposes of 8 
ship battle 292 
first aid during battle by the— 
crew 310 
medical patrols 310 
surgical teams 310 
gas defense 313 
medical department in 313 
treament of “gassed” cases 314 
after decontamination 315 
decontamination 314 
special notes on— 
Lewisite 315 
mustard gas 315 
lung casualties 316 354 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Drill-s—Continued. Page 
ship battle—Continued. 
general 292 
action, conditions of readiness for 296 
battle exercises 293 
clear ship 294 
for action 294 
phase I 308 
phase II 309 
strip ship 294 
quarters 298 
landing forces and 239 
medical department after battle 311 
dead, care and disposition of 312 
reports of killed and wounded 312 
wounded— 
collection of 311 
evacuation of 312 
killed and, reports of 312 
treatment of 311 
organization 304 
peacetime preparedness 304 
material readiness 304 
personnel readiness 306 
wartime preparedness 306 
clear ship 308 
phase I 308 
material 308 
personnel 309 
phase II 309 
material 309 
personnel 309 
material 306 
personnel 307 
task 301 
tent, and shelter 317 INDEX 
355 
Duties— Page 
in reduced squads 107 
of instructor 57 
Echelon-s 2 
of medical assistance 287 
additional hospital assistance 292 
advanced-hospital station 292 
ambulance station 289 
battalion-aid station 288 
collecting station 288 
company aid 287 
rear-hospital station 291 
regimental medical headquarters 288 
Effects, personal; equipment, uniforms, clothing 
and 280 
Element 2 
Ensign, national 23 
Equipment— 
and clothing for men 253 
double tents and, inspection of 324 
examination of, on the bunk 267 
for officers 252 
individual— 
clothing and 252 
for officers 281 
Marine Corps, for men 281 
uniforms, clothing and 280 
inspection of tents and 322 
medical department supplies and 284 
personal field, inspection of, while in ranks 99, 263 
uniforms, clothing, and personal effects 280 
Establishing the camp 334 
Evacuation of wounded 312 
Examination of equipment on the bunk 267 356 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Page 
Exercises 27 
battle 293 
of the— 
arms, from the starting positions 46 
legs, from the starting positions 43 
Expeditionary force, the 274 
Extend to normal interval, to 74 
Extended—- 
mass formation, to form 96 
order 6 
Eyes right or left 61 
Face in marching, to 69 
Facings 63 
Field- 
equipment, personal, inspection of, while in 
ranks 99, 263 
functions of medical units in the 285 
music 2 
service— 
medical department on 275 
preparation for 280 
Fireman’s (across back) carry 211 
First— 
aid— 
by the— 
company-aid men 273 
crew 310 
medical patrols 310 
surgical teams 310 
during battle 310 
petty officer 7 INDEX 
357 
Page 
Flank 2 
to march— 
by the 69 
to the 75 
towards a 76,84 
Fleet Marine Force 275 
Folding— 
tents— 
pyramidal 330 
wall and hospital 326 
Force-s— 
-expeditionary, the 274 
Fleet Marine ' 275 
landing 239 
and ship battle drill 239 
battalion 240 
brigade 242 
composition of 239 
ship’s 239 
Foreword V 
Form, to-—- 
column of twos 78 
and single file and re-form 87 
company mass 95 
extended mass formation 96 
for shelter tents 85 
line to the front 84 
the— 
company 91 
platoon 81 
with close interval between men 93 358 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Page 
Pormation-s 2, 235 
company inspection; 98 
drill, physical 25 
for instruction with unloaded Army litter 110 
mass 6 
and movements 95 
extended, to form 96 
of— 
litter squads HO 
more than one squad 79 
the platoon, composition and 80 
Forming the squad 72 
Forward, to march 140 
Four-hand grasp carry 225 
Front 2 
to form line to the 84 
Frontage 2 
Functions of medical units in the field 285 
Funeral, military 24 
Gas- 
defense 313 
medical department in 313 
treatment of “gassed” cases 314 
after decontamination 315 
decontamination 314 
special notes on— 
Lewisite 315 
mustard gas 315 
lung casualties 316 
mustard, special notes on 315 INDEX 
359 
General— Page 
principles 7 
glossary and 1 
quarters 298 
rules for— 
moving patients 146 
the guide 9 
GlossaKy 1 
and general principles 1 
Grasp carry, four-hand 225 
Ground litter, to 127 
Group 2 
Grouping recruits 57 
Guide ___• 2 
general rules for the 9 
in marching 82 
Guidon-s— 
--and special units, posts of officers, petty officers. _ 10 
bearer for drills and ceremonies, positions of the. 90 
Half step 68 
Halt, to 67 
Hand, salute with the 63 
Head 2 
Headquarters— 
company 242 
battalion 240 
regimental 242 
regimental medical 288 
Hospital— 
assistance, additional 292 
corpsmen, company 279 
station— 
advanced 290 
rear 291 
tents, wall and 326 360 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Page 
Identification tags 285 
Improvisations— 
miscellaneous 105 
of litters 103 
suggested 103 
In arms carry 203, 227 
Individual-s— 
equipment— 
clothing and 252 
for officers 281 
uniforms, clothing, and 280 
Marine Corps equipment for men 281 
position of 80 
Infantry regiment 242 
Injured, transportation of sick and 145 
Inspecting officer other than company commander 99 
Inspection— 
company 98 
formation 98 
procedure 98 
of— 
double tents and equipment 324 
personal field equipment while in ranks 99. 263 
quarters or camp 100 
tents and equipment 322 
Instruction— 
arrangement for 145 
by the numbers 13 
coach and pupil method of 1 
formation for 110 
in— 
artificial respiration 344 
reduced squads 107 
the use of the Army litter 106 INDEX 
361 
Instruction—Continued. Page 
patients for purposes of 145 
with unloaded litters 110 
formation for 110 
Instructor, duties of 57 
Interval 2 
close— 
to— 
form with, between men 93 
march (or form) at 82 
obtain 74 
normal— 
to—- 
extend to 74 
march (or form) at 83 
to take and to assemble 77 
Juniors give way to seniors j, 20 
Killed and wounded, reports of 312 
Landing force-s 239 
and ship battle drill 239 
battalion 240 
headquarters company 240 
medical section 241 
brigade 242 
medical battalion 242 
composition of 239 
medical detachment 250 
clothing and individual equipment 252 
equipment— 
and clothing for men 253 
for officers 252 
personal field, inspection of, while in ranks__ 263 
general 250 
mission 271 362 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Landing force-s—Continued. Page 
organization 243 
general 243 
staff 244 
surgeons 246 
assistant-— 
battalion 249 
regimental 248 
battalion 249 
dental officers 249 
regimental 248 
regiment, infantry 242 
regimental headquarters company 242 
band section 241 
medical platoon 242 
ship’s 239 
Left 6 
eyes right or 61 
right and, use of 9 
Legs— 
carry, arms and 224 
combined starting positions of the arms and 41 
exercises of the, from the starting positions 43 
starting positions of the 31 
Lewisite— 
burn cases, extreme mustard or 316 
special notes on 315 
Lifesaving methods 337 
general 337 
resuscitation 338 
artificial respiration : 338 
supplementary treatment 344 
when victim is brought ashore still breathing 
and conscious 338 INDEX 
363 
Lift— Page 
open litter, loaded or unloaded, to 138 
patient and place litter in position, to 147 
Line 6 
to— 
bring litter squad into 135 
the front, to form 84 
Litter-s 6 
Army— 
description of 101 
metal-pole 102 
wooden-pole 103 
instruction in the use of the 106 
manual of the 101 
transportation with 145 
instruction— 
arrangement for 145 
patients for purposes of 145 
at the shoulder 113 
closed, strapped and 107 
definition 101 
for military use, requisites of a 101 
improvisation of 103 
in position, to lift patient and place 147 
instruction— 
arrangement for 145 
in reduced squads 107 
in the use of the Army 106 
commands 106 
purpose 106 
scope 106 
patients for purposes of 145 
with unloaded 110 
486912°—43 24 364 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Litter-s—Continued. Page 
loaded— 
to carry— 
by four bearers 165 
up or down stairs 172 
metal-pole 102 
Navy 180 
handling ! 184 
four bearers 186 
positions of bearers reversed 199 
three bearers 198 
two bearers 198 
loaded— 
to— 
carry 190 
hoist through a hatchway, ladder un- 
shipped 194 
lower 191 
lower through a hatchway, ladder un- 
shipped 195 
transport— 
from above to deck below, ladder 
shipped 197 
from below to upper deck, ladder 
shipped 195 
to— 
load 187 
unload 193 
transportation with 180 
open, loaded or unloaded, to lift 138 
posts, to resume 137 
procurement of 113 
return of 113 INDEX 
365 
Litter-s—Continued. Page 
squad-s 106,280 
composition 106 
designation of 110 
duties in reduced 107 
formation of 110 
instruction in reduced 107 
reduced— 
duties in 107 
instruction in 107 
to bring into line 135 
strapped and closed 107 
to— 
carry 122 
close 132 
ground 127 
load and unload 146 
back cases 162 
with three bearers 152 
with two bearers 152 
lower 143 
open 128 
order 117 
shoulder 117 
strap the 134 
to unload 150 
transportation— 
with— 
Army 145 
Navy 180 
without 201 
unloaded—- 
formation for instruction 110 
instruction with 110 
wooden-pole 103 366 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Load and unload, to— Page 
back cases 162 
litter 146 
with— 
three bearers 152 
two bearers 152 
Loaded— 
litter— 
to carry— 
by four bearers 165 
up or down stairs 172 
Navy litter— 
to— 
carry 190 
hoist through a hatchway with ladder un- 
shipped 194 
lower 191 
through a hatchway with ladder unshipped- 195 
transport from— 
above to deck below with ladder shipped. _ 197 
below to upper deck with ladder shipped 195 
Lower, to— 
litter 143 
loaded Navy litter 191 
patient 238 
on litter 149 
Lung casualties 316 
Major obstacles, to pass 169 
Manual of the Army litter 101 
March— 
by the flank, to 69 
forward, to 140 INDEX 
367 
March—Continued. Page 
(or form) at— 
close interval 82 
normal interval 83 
other than at Attention, to 70 
the platoon, to 82 
to the— 
flank 75 
oblique, to 75 
right, to 95 
towards a flank, to_» 76, 84 
Marching-s— 
---double time 66 
guide in 82 
quick time 65 
steps and 65 
to—■ 
face in 69 
Marine— 
Corps equipment for men, individual 281 
Force, Fleet 275 
Mark time, to 67 
Mass— 
company, to form 95 
formation-s 6 
and movements 95 
extended, to form 96 
Material readiness 304, 306 
Medical— 
assistance, echelons of 287 
battalion 242 
department— 
after battle 311 
in gas defense 313 368 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Medical—Continued. Page 
department—Continued. 
on field service 275 
company hospital corpsmen 279 
organization 276 
staff surgeons 277 
task 275 
supplies and equipment 284 
detachment 250 
mission 271 
headquarters, regimental 288 
patrols, first aid by the 310 
platoon 242 
records 285 
section 241 
tentage 325 
units in the field— 
echelons of medical assistance 287 
functions of 285 
general principles 286 
plans and orders 285 
Men— 
company-aid 241, 272, 273, 279 
equipment and clothing for 253 
individual Marine Corps equipment for 281 
to form with close interval between 93 
Metal-pole litter 102 
Method-s— 
lifesaving 337 
of instruction, coach and pupil 1 
Military— 
courtesies 15 
funeral 24 
use, requisites of a litter for 101 369 
Page 
Minor obstacles, to pass 169 
Miscellaneous starting positions 37 
Mission 271 
Music, field 2 
Mustard— 
gas, special notes on 315 
or Lewisite burn cases, extreme 316 
National— 
anthem 21 
ensign 23 
Navy litter 180 
handling 184 
four bearers 186 
position of bearers reversed 199 
three bearers 198 
two bearers ; 198 
loaded— 
to— 
carry 190 
hoist through hatchway, ladder unshipped 194 
lower through hatchway, ladder unshipped__ 195 
transport from— 
above to deck below, ladder shipped 195 
below to upper deck, ladder shipped 197 
to— 
load 187 
unload 193 
transportation with 180 
Normal interval, to extend to 74 
Numbering of units 10 
Numbers, instruction by the 13 
Oblique, to march to the 75 
INDEX 370 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Obstacles— Page 
major, to pass 169 
minor, to pass 169 
over 5 feet high, to surmount 170 
to pass 166 
Obtain close interval, to 74 
Off, to count 73 
OfScer-s— 
chief petty 7 
positions of, for drills and ceremonies 89 
dental 249 
equipment for 252 
first petty 7 
individual equipment for 281 
inspecting, other than company commander 99 
petty officers, guidons, and special units, posts of_ 10 
second petty 7 
Open— 
and to close ranks, to 84 
litter, to 128 
Order-s— 
-close 6 
extended 6 
litter, to 117 
plans and 285 
Organization— 
landing force— 
general 243 
staff surgeons ’ 246 
assistant—- 
battalion 249 
regimental 248 
battalion 249 
dental officers 249 
regimental 247 
medical department on field service 275 Page 
Pace 6 
Pack, heavy marching order, to assemble the 254 
Partial changes of direction 10 
Pass, to— 
major obstacles 169 
minor obstacles 169 
obstacles 166 
Patient-s— 
-and place litter in position, to lift 147 
for purposes of instruction 145 
general rules for moving 146 
to— 
carry by— 
one bearer 236 
two bearers 237 
lower 238 
Patrols, medical, first aid by the 310 
Peacetime preparedness 304 
Personal— 
effects; equipment, uniforms, clothing, and 280 
field equipment, inspection of, while in ranks 99, 263 
Personnel readiness 306 
Petty officer-s— 
-chief 7 
first 7 
guidons, and special units, posts of officers 10 
second 7 
Physical drill 25 
exercise-s 27 
of the— 
arms, from the starting positions 46 
legs, from the starting positions 43 
INDEX 
371 372 
Physical drill—Continued. Page 
formation 25 
standing position, the 27 
starting positions 26 
combined, of the arms and legs 41 
exercises of the— 
arms, from the 46 
legs, from the 43 
miscellaneous 37 
of the— 
arms 28 
legs 31 
trunk 36 
Pickaback carry 211 
Pitching— 
tents— 
double shelter 322, 323 
pyramidal 328 
single shelter 317,318 
wall and hospital 326 
Plans and orders 285 
Platoon— 
composition and formation of the 80 
medical 242 
position of individuals 80 
school of the 79 
to— 
dismiss the 81 
form— 
for shelter tents 85 
the 81 
march the 82 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK INDEX 
373 
Page 
Point of rest 6 
Position-s 58 
eyes right or left 61 
facings ; 63 
of— 
Attention 58 
individuals 80 
the chief petty officer for drills and ceremonies. 89 
the guidon bearer for drills and ceremonies 90 
rests 58 
salute with the hand 63 
standing, the 27 
starting 26 
combined, of the arms and legs 41 
exercises of the— 
arms, from the 46 
legs, from the 43 
miscellaneous 37 
of the— 
arms 28 
legs 31 
trunk 36 
to lift patient and place litter in 147 
Posts— 
litter, to resume 137 
of officers, petty officers, guidons, and special 
units 10 
Precision in drill 8 
Preparation for field service 280 
Preparedness— 
peacetime ' 304 
readiness— 
material 304 
personnel 306 374 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Preparedness—Continued. Page 
wartime 306 
material 306 
personnel 307 
Principles— 
general 7, 286 
glossary and 1 
Procedure, company inspection 98 
Procurement of litters 113 
Pupil method of instruction, coach and 1 
Purpose-s— 
---------of— 
drill 8 
instruction, patients for 145 
Pyramidal tents 328 
folding 330 
pitching 328 
striking 329 
Quarterdeck, salutes to colors and 22 
Quarters— 
general 298 
or camp, inspection of 100 
Quick time 6, 65 
marching 65 
Rank-s 6 
inspection of personal field equipment while in_ 99, 263 
to open and to close 84 
Readiness— 
for action, conditions of 296 
material 304, 306 
personnel 3Q6, 309 
Rear-hospital station 291 
Records, medical 285 INDEX 
375 
Recruit-s— Page 
grouping 57 
school of the 57 
Reduced squads— 
duties in 107 
instruction in 107 
Regiment, infantry 242 
Regimental- 
headquarters company 242 
medical headquarters 288 
surgeon 247 
assistant 248 
Reports of killed and wounded 312 
Requisites of a litter for military use 101 
Respiration, artificial 338 
instruction in 344 
Rest-s 58 
point of 6 
Resume litter posts, to 137 
Resuscitation 338 
respiration, artificial 338 
supplementary treatment 344 
when victim is brought ashore still breathing 
and conscious 338 
Return of litters 113 
Revoke a command, to 9 
Rifle— 
-blanket carry 224 
-overcoat carry 223 
Right 6 
and left, use of 9 
or left, eyes 61 
to march to the 95 376 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Rules— Page 
for— 
company drill 90 
saluting 17 
general, for— 
moving patients 146 
the guide 9 
Salute-s 16 
courtesies other than the 19 
how to render the 16 
is omitted, when the 1 18 
to colors and quarter-deck 22 
when to 17 
whom to 16 
with the hand 63 
Saluting, rules for 17 
School-s— 
---------of the— 
company 89 
platoon 79 
recruit 57 
squad 72 
platoon, and company 71 
Scope 7 
Second petty officer 7 
Section— 
band 241 
medical 241 
Secure slings, to 130 
Selection of a camp site 333 
Seniors, juniors give way to 20 377 
Service— Page 
company 242 
field— 
medical department on 275 
preparation for 280 
Shelter 332 
general 333 
tent-s— 
double, pitching 322, 323 
drill and 31,7 
single, pitching 317 
striking 325 
to form for 33 
Ship-s— 
---------battle drill 292 
landing forces and 239 
organization 304 
task 301 
clear, for action 294, 308 
phase I 308 
phase II 309 
landing force 239 
Shoulder— 
litter— 
at the 113 
to 117 
Sick and injured, transportation of 145 
Side step 68 
Single shelter tents, pitching 317 
commands 
execution 317 
formation 317 
purpose 317 
supervision . 322 
INDEX 378 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Site, camp— Page 
considerations— 
favorable 334 
unfavorable 334 
selection of a 333 
Slings, to secure 130 
Special units, posts of officers, petty officers, guidons, 
and 
Squad-s— 
formations of more than one 79 
forming the 72 
litter 106, 280 
composition.' 106 
designation of HO 
duties in reduced 107 
formation of HO 
instruction in reduced 107 
to bring into line 135 
platoon, and company, schools of the 71 
reduced— 
duties in 107 
instruction in 107 
school of the 72 
to— 
align the 74 
dismiss the 73 
Staff 244 
surgeons 246, 277 
Standing position, the 27 
Starting positions 26 
combined, of the arms and legs 41 
exercises of the— 
arms, from the 46 
legs, from the 43 INDEX 
379 
Starting positions—Continued. Page 
miscellaneous 
of the— 
arms 28 
legs 31 
trunk 36 
Station— 
advanced-hospital 290 
ambulance 289 
battalion-aid 288 
collecting 288 
rear-hospital 291 
Step-s . 7 
and marchings 65 
back 68 
half 68 
side 68 
to change 70 
Strap litter, to 134 
Strapped and closed, litter 107 
Striking— 
tents— 
pyramidal 329 
shelter 325 
wall and hospital 326 
Supplementary treatment 344 
Supplies and equipment, medical department 284 
Supporting carry 201 
Surgeon-s— 
--------a- 
ssistantbattalion 249 
regimental 243 
486912°—43 25 380 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Surgeon-s—Continued. Page 
battalion 249 
regimental 247 
staff 246,277 
Surgical teams, first aid by the 310 
Surmount obstacles over 5 feet high, to 170 
Table of contents in 
Tags, identification 285 
Take interval and to assemble, to 77 
Task 275 
Teams, surgical, first aid by the 310 
Tent-s— 
and equipment, inspection of 322 
double— 
and equipment, inspection of 324 
shelter, pitching 322. 323 
commands 323 
execution 323 
formation 323 
purpose 322 
drill and shelter 317 
folding— 
pyramidal-. 330 
wall and hospital 327 
hospital, wall and 326 
pitching 318 
double shelter 322 
pyramidal 328 
single shelter 317 
wall and hospital 326 
pyramidal 328 
folding 330 
pitching 328 
striking 329 INDEX 
381 
Tent-s—Continued. Page 
shelter— 
striking 320 
to form for 85 
single shelter— 
pitching 317,318 
commands 317 
execution 317 
formation SI7 
purpose 317 
supervision 322 
wall and hospital 326 
folding 327 
pitching 326 
striking 327 
Tentage, medical 325 
Threes (or fours), to form column of 97 
Tied-hands crawl or carry 220 
Time- 
double 2,9,66 
marching 66 
quick 65 
marching 65 
to mark 67 
Transportation— 
of sick and injured 145 
drill 235 
with— 
Army litter 145 
Navy litter 180 
without litter 201 
on horseback 233 382 
HOSPITAL CORPS DRILL BOOK 
Treatment— Page 
of— 
"gassed.” cases 314 
after decontamination 315 
decontamination 314 
special notes on— 
Lewisite 315 
mustard gas 315 
lung casualties 316 
wounded 311 
supplementary 344 
Trunk, starting positions of the 36 
Twos— 
and single file and re-form, to form column of— 87 
column of, to form 78 
from single file and re-form, to form column of 78 
Unit-s— 
attached 1 
medical, in the field, functions of 285 
numbering of 10 
special, posts of officers, petty officers, guidons, 
and 10 
Use- 
military, requisites of a litter for 101 
of— 
right and left 9 
the Army litter, instruction in the 106 
Vesicant burns 316 
Wall and hospital tents 326 
folding 327 
pitching 326 
striking 327 INDEX 
383 
Page 
Wartime preparedness 306 
material 306 
personnel 307 
Wooden-pole litter 103 
Wounded— 
collection of 311 
evacuation of 312 
reports of killed and 312 
treatment of 311 
Zone, beaten 1